Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Multilin f650
Multilin f650
Multilin
F650
Digital Bay Controller
Instruction manual
GEK-106310N
GE Multilin GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue Avda. Pinoa, 10
L6E 1B3 Markham, ON -CANADA 48170 Zamudio SPAIN
T (905) 294 6222 F (905) 294 8512 T +34 94 485 88 00 F +34 94 485 88 45
E [email protected] E [email protected]
Internet: www.GEMultilin.com
7. IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7.1 IEC61850 GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (GSSE)
7.1.1 REMOTE DEVICES............................................................................................7-1
7.1.2 REMOTE INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-3
7.1.3 REMOTE OUTPUTS ..........................................................................................7-4
7.2 IEC 61850 PROFILE FOR F650
7.2.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................7-6
7.2.2 ACSI CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ...............................................................7-6
7.2.3 LOGICAL NODES ............................................................................................7-11
7.2.4 COMMON DATA CLASS..................................................................................7-29
7.2.5 DATASETS .......................................................................................................7-44
7.2.6 MAPPINGS BETWEEN TOC CURVES IN IEC 61850 AND F650 RELAY
IMPLEMENTATION. 7-46
7.2.7 UNIDADES Y ESCALAS DE LOS DATOS ANALÓGICOS .............................7-47
13. TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
A. LOGIC OPERANDS
1
To help ensure years of trouble free operation, please read through the following chapter for informa-
tion to help guide you through the initial installation procedures of your new relay.
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL OR USE THE RELAY, IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT ALL WARNINGS
AND CAUTIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE REVIEWED TO HELP PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY,
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, AND/OR DOWNTIME.
CAUTION: THE OPERATOR OF THIS INSTRUMENT IS ADVISED THAT IF THE EQUIPMENT IS USED IN
A MANNER NOT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL, THE PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT
MAY BE IMPAIRED
WARNING: MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION SHALL ONLY BE PERFORMED BY DULY QUAL-
IFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. FOR PERSONAL SECURITY PURPOSES, BEFORE ACCOMPLISHING
ANY WITHDRAWAL OR INSERTION OPERATION, THE RELAY MUST BE POWERED OFF AND ALL
THE REAR TERMINALS MUST BE POTENTIAL FREE. THE RELAY MUST BE GROUNDED USING THE
REAR GROUNDING SCREW.
The modular design of the relay allows withdrawal and insertion of the communication module.
Figure 1–2:: MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION shows the location of communication modules on the rear part of the
relay. Skilled personnel must carry out the insertion or extraction of communication boards only after interrupting the relay
auxiliary voltage and ensuring that all the rear terminals are potential free.
Communication boards are installed on the rear of the unit, the upper port being reserved for the asynchronous
communications board and CAN, and the lower port for the ETHERNET board in any of its configurations.
1
Before performing any of these actions, control power must be removed from the relay and all the relay rear terminals
must be potential free. A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid
electrostatic discharges that may cause damage to the electronic components.
WITHDRAWAL: Loose the small screws that keep the faceplate in place and extract the module.
INSERTION: Insert the module and press it firmly in the case, until it is completely fixed. After this, bolt the faceplate
screws and replace the control power. Check that the relay is fully operative.
GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage in the relay, connected equipment or personnel whenever this safety
rules are not followed.
1
Magnetic Module for AC
Currents and Voltage Inputs
GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage in the relay, connected equipment or personnel
whenever this safety rules are not followed.
1 Open the relay packaging and inspect the relay for physical damage.
Refer to the label on the side of the relay verifies that the model number is the correct model ordered.
- Please ensure that you receive the following items with your relay:
• Mounting screws for rear terminals and for fixing the relay to a cabinet
• CD containing EnerVista F650 Setup software
• Wiring diagram
• Certificate of Compliance
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE
Multilin Home Page www.geindustrial.com/multilin.
Note: If there is any physical damage detected on the relay, or any of the contents listed are missing, please
contact GE Multilin immediately at:
1
EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA:
GE MULTILIN
Av. Pinoa, 10
48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya (SPAIN)
Tel.: (34) 94-485 88 54, Fax: (34) 94-485 88 38
E-mail: [email protected]
The information provided herein does not intend to cover all details of variations of the equipment nor does it take
into account the circumstances that may be present in your installation, operating or maintenance activities.
Should you wish to receive additional information, or for any particular problem that cannot be solved by referring
to the information contained herein, please contact GENERAL ELECTRIC MULTILIN.
1 The F650 ground screw shown in Figure 1–5:: LOCATION OF GROUNDING SCREW must be correctly
grounded.
This platform of relays has been designed to meet the goals that are appearing nowadays in the environment of new
1
substations.
Historically, protection, control and metering functions have been performed by electromechanical elements at the
beginning, then static devices, and finally by digital equipment able to integrate all these functions in a single device, called
IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
These IEDs not only must be able to perform all functions related to system protection and control, but also, using high
speed communications, they must share information among them and send this information to control dispatch centers,
thus reducing the quantity of auxiliary elements and wiring up to 70%.
The F650 relay belongs to this new generation of devices, and can be easily incorporated in substation automation
schemes.
F650 units incorporate a series of interconnected modules to perform protection and control functions. Firstly, it includes a
group of AC transformers for retrieving current and voltage. These magnitudes, once digitized, are sent to a digital signal
processor (DSP), which performs metering functions and communicates with the main processor via a wide band bus. This
architecture liberates the main processor from performing real time metering, allowing a high sampling rate, of up to 64
samples per cycle, without interfering with global performance.
F650 relays are digital devices that include a CPU that can control multiple types of input and output signals.
LAN
Contact Inputs/Outputs are signals associated to physical input/output contacts in the relay
Analog Inputs are signals coming from the inputs of current and voltage transformers, used for monitoring the
power system signals.
Remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs: are signals associated to physical input/output contacts from independent
modules connected to the 650 unit via a fiber optic CAN Bus.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. Control module that enables the unit configuration (assignment of
inputs/outputs) and the implementation of logic circuits.
Protection Elements: Relay protection elements, for example: Overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.
1 The firmware (software embedded in the relay) has been designed using object oriented programming
techniques (OOP). These techniques are based on the use of objects and classes, and provide the software
architecture with the same characteristics as the hardware architecture, i.e., modularity, scalability and
flexibility.
The main processor performs protection, control, and communication functions, incorporating two internal pro-
cessors, one for generic use and a second one dedicated for communications.
A dedicated serial port is used for communication between the main processor and the human-machine inter-
face. Serial connection provides great immunity against electromagnetic disturbances, thus increasing system
safety.
All F650 units incorporate an RS232 serial port on the front of the relay. There is also a possibility to incorpo-
rate up to two additional communication modules on the rear.
One of the modules provides asynchronous serial communications, using different physical media (RS485,
plastic or glass fiber optic) depending on the selected model. The module incorporates two identical ports,
COM1 and COM2. COM2 port is multiplexed with the front port. Additionally, this module may incorporate a
glass fiber optic port for CAN BUS communications, used for the connection to the Remote CAN BUS I/O mod-
ule. This feature allows increasing up to 100% the I/O capability, when the maximum number of I/Os available
inside the relay (up to 32 inputs and 16 outputs) is not enough for a specific application.
Available options are:
Table 1–1: TABLE 1-1 REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 1
X Two RS485 ports and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs
Y Two Plastic F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs
Z Two Glass F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs
The other module provides Ethernet communications (COM3 port), using 10/100BaseTX (self-negotiable speed) or
100BaseFX connectors, depending on the selected model. Most complete models include a double redundant 100BaseFX
fiber optic port. Redundancy is provided at a physical media level; the unit incorporates internally duplicated and
independent controllers for extended system reliability and accessibility.
For options C and D it is required to select the active physical media, by means of an internal selector inside the module.
The factory configuration for this selection is the 10/100BaseTX port.
Finally, internal communication with input and output modules is performed via an internal CAN bus, independent from the
one used for remote CAN BUS I/Os. This fact provides increased communication speed, as well as the possibility of
acknowledgement of modules, abnormalities, etc. As this is a serial port supporting a communications protocol, it provides
extraordinary immunity against external or internal disturbances.
1 The EnerVista F650 Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values
because the PC monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista F650 Setup software to properly operate
on a PC:
• Pentium® class or higher processor (Pentium® II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
• Windows® NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or higher), Windows® 2000, Windows® XP
• Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher
• 64 MB of RAM (128 MB recommended)
• 40 MB of available space on system drive and 40 MB of available space on installation drive
• RS232C serial and Ethernet port for communications to the relay
1.3.2 INSTALLATION
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista F650 Setup are met (see previous section), use
the following procedure to install the EnerVista F650 Setup from the GE EnerVista CD.
5. In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the “F650 Bay Controller” relay from the
Install Software window as shown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release, or select
“CD” if you do not have a web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the F650.
6. If “Web” option is selected, chose the F650 software program and release notes (if desired) from the list and click the
Download Now button to obtain the installation program.
7. EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, double-
click the installation program to install the EnerVista F650 Setup software.
8. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista F650 Setup will be installed.
9. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add EnerVista F650 Setup to the Windows start menu.
1 10. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the EnerVista F650 Setup software. When the Welcome window appears,
click on Next to continue with the installation procedure.
11. When the Choose Destination Location window appears, and if the software is not to be located in the default
directory, click Change… and type in the complete path name including the new directory name and click Next to
continue with the installation procedure.
12. The default program group where the application will be added to is shown in the Selected Program Folder window.
Click Next to begin the installation process, and all the necessary program files will be copied into the chosen directory.
1
13. To finish with the installation process, select the desired language for startup.
14. Click Finish to end the installation. The F650 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the EnerVista F650 Setup software. Please refer to sec-
tion 4.1 in this manual for more information about the EnerVista F650 Setup software interface.
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of
the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista F650 Setup software (available from the GE
EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for instal-
lation instructions).
2. Go to “Communication>Computer” and enter the following data referred to communications:
3. Select Control Type as MODBUS TCP/IP from the drop-down list. This option will display a num-
ber of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet communications.
4. Enter the relay IP address (from “Setpoint>Product Setup >Communication Settings>Net-
work>IP ADDRESS”) in the IP Address field in MODBUS TCP/IP SETUP.
5. Enter the relay ModBus address (from “Setpoint>Product Setup >Communication Set-
tings>ModBus Protocol>ModBus Address COM1/COM2 setting”) in the Unit Identifier (Slave
Address) field.
6. Enter the ModBus port address (from “Setpoint>Product Setup >Communication Set-
tings>ModBus Protocol>ModBus Port Number” setting) in the ModBus Port field.
7. The Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to press the ON but-
ton to begin communicating.
Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of 1
the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista F650 Setup software (available from the GE
EnerVista CD or online from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for instal-
lation instructions).
2. Go to “Communication>Computer” and enter the following data referred to communications:
3. Select Control Type as No Control Type from the drop-down list. This option will display a number
of interface parameters that must be entered for proper serial communications.
4. Enter the relay Slave Address (“Setpoint>Product Setup >Communication Settings>ModBus
Protocol” menu) in the Slave Address field.
5. Enter the physical communications parameters (Baudrate and parity settings) from “Set-
point>Product Setup >Communication Settings>Serial Ports” menu, in their respective fields.
6. The Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to press the ON but-
ton to begin communicating.
1.3.4 COMMUNICATIONS
To communicate with the relay via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight through” serial cable is used. The DB9
male end is connected to the relay and the DB9 or DB25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as
described in the figure below.
Direct connection to the Ethernet port will be carried out using a crossover cable. If this connection is performed through a
hub or switch, we will use direct Ethernet cable.
To communicate with the relay rear RS485 port from a computer RS232 port, an RS232/RS485 converter box is needed.
We recommend using the F485 converter, manufactured by GE. This converter box is connected to the computer using a
straight through serial cable. A shielded twisted pair (20, 22 or 24 AWG according to the American standards; 0.25, 0.34 or
0.5 mm2 according to the European standards) cable is used to connect the converter box to the relay rear communications
terminals. In order to minimize communication errors that could be caused by external noise, it is recommended to use a
shielded twist pair. In order to avoid loops where external currents could flow, the cable shield must be grounded only at
one end.
The converter box (-, +, GND) terminals are connected to the relay (SDA, SDB, GND) terminals respectively. For long
communications cables (longer than 1 km), the RS485 circuit must be terminated in a RC network (i.e. 120 ohm, 1 nF). This
circuit is shown on Figure 1–17:: RS485 CONNECTION FOR F650 UNITS, associated to text Zt(*).
The F650 is a protection, control, monitoring, metering and registering unit, suitable for many different applications, such as
main protection for distribution feeders and transmission lines, as well as backup protection for transformers, busbars,
capacitor banks, etc. The main features of F650 devices include:
• Directional overcurrent protection for phases, neutral, ground and sensitive ground
• Under and overvoltage protection
2
• Under and overfrequency protection
• Autorecloser
• Synchronism
• Metering
• Oscillography registers, fault reports, data logger
• Bay control (open/close commands, etc.)
• Bay mimic.
• Communications (RS232/RS485/fibre optic/Ethernet)
• Fully programmable front buttons, 15 LED’s and input/output contacts
2.2SUMMARY
2.3ORDERING CODE
F650 units are supplied as ½ 19” rack, 6 units high devices, containing the following modules: power supply, CPU, I/O
modules, communication modules. Each of these modules can be supplied in different versions that must be specified
when ordering. The required information to completely define an F650 model is shown on TABLE 2-1.
Table 2–2: ORDERING CODE
2 F650 -
B
- - F - G - - DESCRIPTION
Basic display (4x20 characters)
M Graphic display (240x128 pixels)
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 1
F None
A Redundant RS485
P Redundant plastic fiber optic
G Redundant glass fiber optic
X Redundant RS485 + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Y Redundant plastic fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Z Redundant glass fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
C Cable remote CAN Bus I/O
M RS485 + cable remote CAN Bus I/O
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
B 10/100 Base TX
C 10/100 Base TX + 100 Base FX
D 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base FX
E Redundant 10/100 Base TX
I/O BOARD IN SLOT F
1 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs
2 8 Digital Inputs - 8 Outputs + 2 trip/close circuit supervision
circuits
I/O BOARD IN SLOT G
0 None
1 16 Inputs + 8 Outputs
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
HI 110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300)
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
LOR Redundant LO
HIR Redundant HI
LANGUAGE
English/English
F French/English
P Russian/English (*)
S Spanish/English
F650 units allow monitoring and configuring these I/O boards as if they were internal boards, located on slots F and G. In
this case, slots are labeled as H y J.
The required information to completely define a CIO Module is shown on TABLE 2-2.
CIO H - J - - DESCRIPTION
I/O BOARD IN SLOT H
2
1 16 inputs + 8 outputs
2 8 inputs + 4 circuit supervision circuits + 6 outputs + 2 outputs with
tripping current supervision (latching)
I/O BOARD IN SLOT J
0 None
1 16 inputs + 8 outputs
2 8 inputs + 4 circuit supervision circuits + 6 outputs + 2 outputs with
tripping current supervision (latching)
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
HI 110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300)
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
2.4TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Phase and ground units use as operation magnitude the current value received by the unit in current inputs, while the
neutral unit uses the calculated current value from the three phase currents.
2 The isolated ground unit will be used only for those applications where the neutral is completely isolated, and it uses the
fifth CT of the unit. This CT has a sensitivity that is 10 times higher than the universal model (connected to 1A or 5A
transformers). Therefore, it does not admit such a high permanent overload.
2 Rectifier curve
FlexCurve™ A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial) 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset type Instantaneous or time delayed according to IEEE
Timing accuracy Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3.5% of operate
time or 30 ms. (whichever is greater)
Saturation Level 48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events Selectable by setting
2
t) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27X)
u) UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
v) OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
2.4.2 CONTROL
a) AUTORECLOSE (79)
b) SYNCHROCHECK (25)
Dead/live levels for line and bus 0.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01 V
Maximum voltage difference 2.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
Maximum angle difference 2.0º to 80.0º in steps of 0.1º
Maximum frequency slip 10 to 5000 mHz in steps of 10 mHz
Synchronism time 0.01 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Angle accuracy 2º
Dead Source function None
(DL-DB) Dead Line - Dead Bus
(LL-DB) Live Line-Dead Bus
(DL-LB) Dead Line – Live Bus
Snapshot Events Selectable by setting
c) FUSE FAILURE
e) BREAKER SETTINGS
f) BREAKER MAINTENANCE
KI2t Breaker Counters for Phases A, B, C 0.00 to 9999.99 in steps of 0.01 (kA)2 s
Breaker Openings Counter 0 to 9999 in steps of 1
Breaker Closings Counter 0 to 9999 in steps of 1
g) SWITCHGEAR
2.4.3 MONITORING
a) OSCILLOGRAPHY
b) FAULT LOCATOR
Method: Single-ended
Positive Sequence Module: 0.01 to 250.00 Ohm in steps of 0.01 Ohms
Positive Sequence Angle: 25 to 90º in steps of 1º
Zero Sequence Module: 0.01 to 750.00 Ohms in steps of 0.01 Ohm
Zero Sequence Angle: 25 a 90º in steps of 1º
Line Length: 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 (miles or km)
Accuracy: 5% (typical)
Display Fault on HMI: Selectable by setting
Snapshot Events: Selectable by setting
c) SNAPSHOT EVENTS
d) CONTROL EVENTS
e) DEMAND
Channels: 9
Parameters: Ia (kA RMS), Ib (kA RMS), Ic (kA RMS), Ig (kA RMS), Isg (kA RMS), I2 (kA), P
(MW), Q (MVAr) and S (MVA)
Current and Power Method Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling Demand
Measurements: Each channel shows the present and maximum measured value, with date and
time for the maximum recorded value.
Samples: 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes.
Accuracy: ±1%
Trigger Input Selectable by setting (operation mode selection for the Block Interval calculation
method)
Snapshot Events: Selectable by setting
f) DATA LOGGER
Number of Channels: 1 to 16
Parameters Any available analog actual value
Samples 1 sec., 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.
Storage Capacity Fixed, 32768 measures
a) PLC LOGIC
Programming language: The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the
IEC 61131-3 standard. 2
Lines of code: 512
Supported operations: NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 8 inputs), AND (2 to 8 inputs), NOR (2 to 8 inputs),
NAND (2 to 8 inputs), Latch (Reset Dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers.
2 inputs default gates, from 3 to 8 inputs provided in library format.
Libraries: Logical gates fully programmable by user. To create user-programmable logic to
be distributed as a single object.
Inputs: Any logical variable, contact or virtual input
Number of timers: 8 maximum in each logic scheme (provided in library format)
b) FLEXCURVES
Number: 4 (A through D)
Reset points: 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate points: 80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Time delay: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
Saturation Level 20 times the pickup level
c) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
d) USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of configurable displays: 1 (one line diagram fully configurable). In graphical displays only
Number of fixed displays: 6, Metering (in primary values), Snapshot events (all and new), Alarms, Inputs
and outputs screen with test functionality for inputs and outputs. In graphical dis-
plays only
Number of selectable displays: Logotype, metering or both in scrolling mode, can be selectable as default
screen in text display for all models (basic and mimic). The metering screen con-
tains current and voltages for phases and ground in primary values.
2 2.4.5 METERING
a) CURRENT
Accuracy: ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10 A (for phases and ground)
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5 A (for sensitive ground)
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
b) VOLTAGE
h) POWER FACTOR
Accuracy: 0.02
Parameters: 3-Phase and single phase
i) FREQUENCY
j) ANGLE
2
Accuracy: 2º
2.4.6 INPUTS
a) AC CURRENT INPUTS
b) AC VOLTAGE INPUTS
c) DIGITAL INPUTS
d) IRIG-B INPUT
2.4.8 OUTPUTS
Carry continuous: 16 A
Make and Carry for 1 sec 60 A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: 0.3 A DC max. at 125 Vdc
0.25 A DC max. at 250 Vdc
Operate Time: < 8 ms
Contact material: Silver Alloy
Output Logic Type, Output Type and Pulse Output Time are selectable by setting for each output
Output Logic Type Positive / Negative
Output Type Normal / Pulse / Latch (Selectable by setting for each output)
Pulse Output Time 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (applicable only to signals set as pulse type)
Separate operate and reset signal can be configured by any digital signal programmable through PLC
Contact Outputs (F31-F33, F34- The current seal-in circuit is used for verifying the current condition in a circuit dur-
F36) for board type 2 (supervi- ing the time that the tripping contact remains closed. If the current in the tripping
sion) in slot F: circuit is maintained over 100 mA, the function is sealed independently of the sta-
tus of the function that caused the trip.
2.4.10 COMMUNICATIONS
FRONT PORT:
Front port: COM2
Type RS232
Baud Rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 y 115200 bauds
Default Baud Rate 19200
Protocols available: ModBus® RTU / DNP 3.0
Typical distance: 1200 m
Isolation: 2 kV
ASYNCHRONOUS REAR PORTS:
None or two rear ports (depending on COM1, COM2
model): (rear COM2 multiplexed with front port)
Type (depending on model):
Model F None
Model A Two RS485 ports
Model X Two RS485 ports with CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model P Two 1mm-plastic F.O. ports
Model Y Two 1mm-plastic F.O. ports with CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model G Two multimode glass F.O. ports with ST connectors
Model Z Two multimode glass F.O. ports with ST connectors with CAN for inputs/outputs
module
Optic Features for ST connectors Wave length: 1300nm
devices:
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 y 115200 bauds
Default Baud Rate 19200
Net weight: 5 kg
Packaged: 6 kg
Package dimensions: 30x40x40 cm (DxWxH)
2.4.14 APPROVALS
2.5EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
F650 units can hold two different options for F module:
Option 1:Board with 16 inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 2: Board with 8 digital inputs, 4 circuit supervision outputs, 6 conventional outputs, and two current sensing outputs
Each model has a different wiring diagram, as follows:
3.2MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
The model number and electrical characteristics of the unit are indicated on the label located on the right side
of the relay case.
The metallic case of the unit is highly resistant to corrosion. It is made of stainless steel (AISI 304), coated with
an epoxy layer, and the rest of the metallic pieces are covered with a high quality resistive coating that has
successfully passed at least 96 hours in the salt spray chamber (S/N ASTM B-117).
The front of the relay is made of a conductor thermoplastic, flame retardant (V0), highly resistive material,
which guarantees the unit’s immunity to all kinds of EMI/RFI/ESD interferences. As well, an IP51 (IEC 529)
protection degree against dust and water through the front and with the relay mounted in the panel.
In order to guarantee safety and preventing access to the unit by unauthorized personnel, the front part of the
relay has a sealable cover to protect the RS 232 front port and the operation mode key.
3
3.2.1 MOUNTING
The unit is designed for semi-flush mounting. The relay is secured to the panel with the 4 M6 screws provided
with the unit. The user has access to the front keypad, display and communication port. The wiring is at the
rear of the unit. The drilling dimensions are shown on Figure 3–4:: DRILLING DIMENSIONS DIAGRAM.
Figure 3–5: DIMENSIONS OF THE 19” RACKS 6U HIGH FOR TWO RELAYS
The relay is wired through the terminal blocks located at the rear of the unit. Terminal blocks vary depending
on their functionality. The magnetic module, which receives the CT secondary currents and the metering
voltages, incorporates a very robust terminal board (columns A and B). In this terminal board, current terminals
are shorted two-by-two when the transformer module is extracted, so that the CT secondary never remains
open. For safety reasons it is not allowed to change or swift the magnetic module terminals. The
maximum recommended cable section for this terminal board, with the appropriate terminal, is 6 mm2 (AWG
10).
The rest of the terminal blocks (columns F, G, and H), for power supply, inputs/outputs and IRIG-B, incorporate
high quality connectors with the capacity to withstand a rated current of 15 A at 300 V. These terminal blocks
admit a cable section of up to 2.54 mm2 (AWG 12).
The communication boards have a different type of connector depending on the selected media: RS485, glass
or plastic fiber optic.
A(-)
B(+)
COM 2 (RS485)
GND
A(-)
B(+)
CAN
Tx
3 Rx
Eth1
10/100
UTP
Tx
100FX
Rx
Eth2
Tx
100FX
Rx
Plug-in, 3 poles.
RS485
Communication boards are installed at the rear part of the unit, the upper port being reserved for the
asynchronous communications board and CAN, and the lower port for the ETHERNET board in any of its
configurations.
Skilled personnel must carry out the insertion or extraction of communication boards only after interrupting the
relay auxiliary voltage.
3
3.3.2 DIGITAL INPUTS WITH TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION
The Option 2 I/O board includes two groups of 4 inputs with one common, in terminals F9 to F10. It also
includes 6 auxiliary outputs, in terminals F19 to F30 with normally open contacts and two current sensing
(latching) outputs (F31-F33 and F34-F36).
Besides, there are 2 groups of inputs for trip circuit supervision. The first group includes two isolated digital
inputs, terminals F1-F2 and F3-F4. The second group, symmetrical and identical to the first, is formed by
isolated voltage inputs F15-F16 and F17-F18.
Using voltage detectors and current sensing, it is possible to implement several trip or close circuit supervision
schemes, as well as protection of the unit output contact.
In order to implement these schemes, it is not necessary to perform any setting in the unit. Internal
functions are always operative. The detailed description of trip circuit supervision is included in chap-
ter 5 in this manual.
The Ethernet board is the communication board 2 (COM3) shown in Figure 3–2:: COMMUNICATIONS
MODULE. It is located in the bottom at the rear part of the relay.
In Models C and D, the 10/100BaseTX port is selected by an internal switch. To select between fiber and cable
it is necessary to extract the board, switch the jumper to the selected position, as indicated on Figure 3–10::
FIBER/CABLE SELECTION and insert the board again. As with any other relay manipulation, the relay power
supply must be removed and the operation must be performed only by skilled personnel.
The default port selected by switch is 10/100 TX in factory configuration. The switch selects between cable
(10/100 TX) and the first fiber port (100 FX). In Ethernet board type D (double fiber port) the backup channel is
always fiber.
3.4OPTIC FEATURES
Wave length: 1300nm
Connector types: ST package style
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Transmitter characteristics
Receiver characteristics
Notes:
1. These optical power values are measured with the following conditions:
The Beginning of Live (BOL) to the End of Life (EOL) optical power degradation is typically 1.5 dB per industry
convention for long wavelength LEDs. The actual degration observed in Agilent’s 1300nm LED products is <1 dB, as
specified in this data sheet.
Over the specified operating voltage and temperature ranges.
With HALT Line State, (12.5 MHz square-wave), input signal.
At the end of one meter of noted optical fiber with cladding modes removed.
The average power value can be converted to a peak power value by adding 3 dB. Higher output optical power
transmitters are available on special request.
2. The transmitter provides compliance with the need for Transmit_Disable commands from the FDDI SMT layer by
providing an Output Optical Power level of <-45 dBm average in response to a logic “0” input. This specification applies
to either 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm fiber cables.
3. This specification is intended to indicate the performance of the receiver section of the transceiver when Input Optical
Power signal characteristics are present per the following definitions. The Input Optical Power dynamic range from the
minimum level (with a window time-width) to the maximum level is the range over which the receiver is guaranteed to
provide output data with a Bit Error Ratio (BER) better than or equal to 2.5e-10.
At the Beginning of Life (BOL).
Over the specified operating temperature and voltage ranges.
4. All conditions for Note 3 apply except that the measurement is made at the center of the symbol with no window time-
width.
6 3.3 2.5
This software package uses ModBus protocol, and it is designed to communicate with a single relay at a time. GE offers
different communication software packages, such as GE-POWER, which can be used to communicate simultaneously with
several relays.
EnerVista 650 Setup software provides an easy way to configure, monitor and manage all F650 features.
a )Setting files
EnerVista 650 Setup software provides two ways of working with setting files:
1.OFF LINE Mode: Creating or editing setting files not connected to the relay, to be stored later in the proper unit.
2. ON LINE Mode: Connecting to the relay. This on line mode allows settings modifications, reading metering
values, internal status, oscillography records, event records, etc.
b) Configuration
The relay allows to fully program all the inputs, outputs, LEDs, control events, operations, block signals in
protection elements, switchgear, one line diagram in HMI, and create internal logic.
For simple relay configurations a direct configuration can be used (Relay configuration screen), and for more
complex configurations a PLC Editor tool is provided (Logic Configuration screen).
4
c) Monitoring of all metering values, internal states, inputs and outputs provided by F650 device.
d) Performing the previously configured operations
e) Updating of operating system, firmware version and web server utility.
f) One line diagrams configuration (bay mimics) for its use in models with graphical display only.
g) Registering data info for control events, snapshot events, alarms, fault reports, oscillography files, data logger, etc.
Title
M
ainm
en
uba
r
4 M
ain
ic
onb
ar
W
ork
in
gar
ea
To start communicating with the relay go to “Communication>Computer>Computer settings” section in the main
EnerVista 650 Setup menu.
Safety instructions must be followed before connecting the computer to the relay. Safety instructions are detailed in section
1.1.3 falta hacer referencia cruzada. Connect the relay ground terminal and the communicating computer to a good
grounding. Otherwise, communication may not be viable, or even, in worst cases, the relay and/or the computer could
result damaged by overvoltages.
For on-line working, previously ensure that all relay communication parameters, such as baudrate, slave ModBus address,
etc, match the computer settings.
COMPUTER SETTINGS:
Shows the communication parameters necessary in order to establish communication with the unit. Such as slave address,
communication port, baud rate, parity, control type and startup mode.
Baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits and ModBus slave address for com2 (RS232 front port and second serial port in the
rear communication board) are displayed in the default text logotype main screen.
ModBus Slave Address: ModBus addresses used for serial and Ethernet communication. These parameters can be
accessed through the relay HMI and EnerVista 650 Setup software. In Relay HMI: go to “Main screen>View or Change
Settings menu >Product Setup>Communication> ModBus Protocol”.
To move through the HMI, press intro (press in shuttle key) to enter in the internal menus and “esc” to exit.
In EnerVista 650 Setup go to “Setpoint>Product Setup>Communication Settings>ModBus Protocol”
Baud Rate: Baud rate for serial communication (from 1200 up to 115200 bauds in EnerVista 650 Setup, from 300 to
4 115200 in relay).
Parity: parity for serial communication. None, odd or even can be selected.
Baud rate and parity are serial communication parameters located both in serial ports menu. In relay HMI: go to “Main
screen>View or Change Settings menu >Product Setup>Communication> Serial Ports”. In EnerVista 650 Setup, go
to “Setpoint>Product Setup>Communication Settings>Serial Ports”.
Relay communicating: In status, a message will be displayed with the communication status, e.g. 650 Setup is now talking
to an F650. The ON button will be disabled (in grey color) and the OFF button will be available to press. In this stage the
relay communicating to the computer and the communication parameters cannot be modified. In the example on Figure 4–
2: COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS MENU , communication has not been established yet.
COMMUNICATION OPTIMIZATION:
The parameters shown on the bottom right window (Communication optimization) can improve communication, although it
is recommended to leave the default values indicated by the EnerVista 650 Setup. These parameters are the maximum
time to wait for a response in the relay (in ms) and the maximum attempts to perform before assuming communications
failure.
The rest of options available in the Communication menu in EnerVista 650 Setup are:
• Modem: Allows configuring the unit for remote communications via modem, using telephonic line. It is only available if
the relay is not communicating and if modem has been select on Communication>computer control type selection. Go
to “Communication>Modem”
• Troubleshooting (Serial or Ethernet connection): Lets the user to perform reading or writing in ModBus addresses, for
verifying communications and access to different positions in the ModBus memory map. Only available if the
communication has already been established. Go to “Communication>Troubleshooting”. An example is provided in
Figure 4–3:
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Before updating firmware check that the firmware version that is going to be updated
match the boot code version of the relay. Otherwise it is necessary to update the boot
code before proceeding to update the firmware. Other combinations of firmware and
boot code different from the listed below will not be operative
The boot code version is available in the logotype main screen in HMI; it is the number
between brackets in the first line, e.g. F6501.70 (2.35). The boot code version is 2.35
Firmware version up to 1.5X must be used with Boot Code 2.30 (or 2.20 and 2.35)
Firmware version from 1.6X up to 1.7X must be used with Boot Code 2.35
Thanks to the use of a double flash memory, one with the Bootcode startup program and the boot code, and a second one
with the application program (firmware), a high reliability is guaranteed when updating the unit firmware, as even in the
case of a communication breakdown during the firmware upgrade process, we can retry the process for an unlimited
number of times. 4
• Upgrade 650 web server (Ethernet connection): Go to “Communications> Upgrade 650 web server”. The relay web
server application can be updated to further versions (if available) using this menu without modifying the relay boot
code.
• Upload info files to relay (Ethernet connection): Go to “Communications>Upload info files to relay”. This
functionality is used to store setting files (*.650) inside the relay, as well as auxiliary files used by the programmable
logic graphical editor (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
• Download info files from relay (Ethernet connection): Go to “Communications>Download info files from relay”.
This functionality is used for retrieving the files (*.650 and *.pep, *.aut, *.lib) that have been previously stored in the
relay flash memory.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
*.650 files contain protection, control settings, relay configuration and compiled logic
equations. This file can be retrieved from the relay, using the “File>Get info from
relay” option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through serial or Ethernet communication).
“File>Send info to relay” option stores this *.650 file in the relay.
*.pep, *.aut and lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the
logic (virtual outputs) in the relay. These files can be stored in the relay, using the
“Communication>Upload info files to relay” option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through
Ethernet communication). They can be retrieved using “Communication>Download
info files to relay” option in EnerVista 650 Setup program (Ethernet communication).
Take into account that the *.pep, *.aut and library files are necessary to modify the PLC
logic (virtual outputs). Without these files setting and configuration can be modified but
not logic equations (virtual outputs). It is advisable to use the
“Communication>Upload info files to relay” option to store these logic configuration
files into the relay.
R u n E n e r V is t a F 6 5 0 S e t u p
O p e n a * . 6 5 0 f ile
(“F ile > O p e n ” m e n u )
M o d if y p r o t e c t io n S e t t i n g s
a n d r e la y c o n f ig u r a t io n
4 I s it n e c e s s a r y t o
YES
p ro g ra m
a d d it io n a l lo g ic ?
L a u n c h t h e L o g ic C o n f i g u r a t io n t o o l in E n e r V is t a
F 6 5 0 S e tu p ( “ S e t p o in t> L o g ic C o n f ig u r a t io n ” )
C r e a t e n e w o r m o d if y t h e e x is t i n g lo g ic :
(“F ile > O p e n P r o je c t”)
NO NO
C o m p il e a n d s a v e lo g ic f ile ( * . p e p ) a n d d r a w in g
d e s ig n ( * . a u t ) in L o g ic C o n f ig u r a t io n t o o l
E x i t P L C G r a p h ic E d i t o r a n d s a v e t h e * . 6 5 0 f il e
f r o m t h e m a i n a p p l ic a t io n m e n u
I s t h e r e la y
c o m p le t e ly
c o n f ig u r e d ?
YES
S a v e * . 6 5 0 s e t t i n g s & c o n f ig u r a t i o n f ile
S t o r e in t h e c o m p u t e r t h e L o g ic c o n f ig u r a t io n f i le s ( * . p e p , * . a u t , * . lib ) a s
w e ll a s t h e * . 6 5 0 f o r f u r t h e r lo g i c c h a n g e s .
NOTE 1: Depending on the type of Inputs/Outputs incorporated in relay slots F and G, configuration options will be different.
There are 2 template files available for working off-line with any F650 available model:
Table 4–1: TYPES OF FILES GENERATED BY ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE OPERATION MODE OFF-LINE:
In case of using element libraries (either existing (“File Library>Open Library”) or created by the user (“File Library>New
Library”)), the program will create and manage the corresponding files (*.lib) in a folder named FDB (Functional Block
Diagram). These files are used for the PLC project compilation. It is necessary to store them with the other logic
configuration files that built the PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
Besides sending basic information to the relay (Settings + configuration) in *.650 format, it is recommended to store *.650,
*.pep, *.aut and *.lib files inside the relay (“Communication>Upload info files to relay”), to ensure that logic configuration
files will be available in the future for further logic modifications; either if these files are not used by the relay, they are
required for connecting to a relay and analyzing its configuration. The program manages the logic configuration files
globally, so that when the user selects to save file *.pep in the relay, the associated *.aut and *.lib files are also stored.
R u n E n e r V is ta F 6 5 0 S e tu p
C o n n e c t to th e re la y
(“C o m m u n ic a tio n > C o m p u te r > O N ”)
NO
M o d ify a n d s e n d to th e
r e la y p r o t e c t i o n S e t t in g s
a n d r e la y c o n fig u r a tio n
YES
Is it n e c e s s a r y to
p ro g ra m
a d d it i o n a l lo g ic ? 4
L a u n c h t h e L o g ic C o n f ig u r a t io n t o o l i n E n e r V is t a
F 6 5 0 S e tu p (“S e tp o in t> L o g ic C o n fig u r a tio n ”)
C r e a t e n e w o r m o d if y t h e e x i s t in g lo g ic
(“F ile > O p e n P r o je c t”)
NO C o m p il e ( “ R u n > C o m p i l e ” )
a n d s a v e l o g i c f i le ( * . p e p ) a n d d r a w i n g d e s i g n
( * . a u t ) in 6 5 0 P L C E d i t o r l ( “ F i l e > S a v e P r o j e c t ” )
S e n d lo g ic t o r e l a y ( “ R u n > S e n d E q u a t i o n s t o
R e l a y ” ) a n d E x i t P L C G r a p h ic E d i t o r
I s t h e r e la y
c o m p le t e l y
c o n fig u r e d ?
YES
S a v e a ll s e t t i n g s & c o n f ig u r a t io n ( “ F i l e > G e t i n f o f r o m r e l a y ” )
S t o r e in t h e r e l a y t h e L o g ic c o n f ig u r a t io n f il e s ( * . p e p , * . a u t , * . li b ) a s w e l l a s t h e
* . 6 5 0 f o r f u r t h e r lo g ic c h a n g e s . ( “ C o m m u n i c a t i o n > U p l o a d i n f o f i l e s t o r e l a y ” )
Table 4–2: TYPES OF FILES CREATED BY ENERVISTA 650 SETUP– ONLINE OPERATION MODE
4 Send settings and configuration from file: Launch 650 PLC Editor (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)
Send configuration and logic Open the created PLC project (“File>Open Project”)
compiled equation to relay: Compile the project (“Run>Compile”)
“File>Send info to relay”,
Send protection and
control settings to relay: select *.650 file, choose
“Relay and Logic
“File>Send info to Configuration” option in
relay”, select *.650 file,
choose Protection and screen and press send.
When the message
Control settings option in “Configuration stored”
screen and press send
appear in the relay HMI the
configuration has been
stored.
Basic Modify settings and configuration directly in the relay:
information
transfer mode Go to “Settings>Relay
to the relay Configuration> Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay
>>Outputs (“Run>Send Equations to Relay”). Texts of virtual outputs are
>>LEDs not stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to be
Go to “Setpoint> >>Operations edited.
>>Product Setup >>Protection Elements
>>System Setup >>Oscillography
>>Protection Elements >>Operations
>>Control Elements >>Control Events
>>Inputs/Outputs” in >>Switchgear
EnerVista 650 Setup and >>Inputs
modify the selected >>Virtual Inputs
settings and press store >>Operations
to send them to the relay. >>MMI (HMI)”
in EnerVista 650 Setup,
modify the selected values
and press store to send them
to the relay.
PLC Editor:
EnerVista 650 Setup:
The relay provides this “File>Save Project” “File>Save Library”
EnerVista 650 Setup: information in a basic format
“File>Get info from (compiled equations). It is The relay will not The relay will not The relay will not
File storage in relay”. User definable necessary to have the logic provide this provide this provide this
PC texts retrieved are configuration files used for information unless information unless information unless
operations, events, and creating the PLC project to the *.pep file is the *.pep file is the *.pep file is stored
LEDs. view the logic in a graphical stored in the relay stored in the relay. in the relay.
way (FDB) and be able to
modify it (virtual outputs). To store the logic configuration files in the relay use the
“Communication>Upload info files to relay” option
File storage inside the relay in a flash memory (RECOMMENDED): “Communication>Upload info files to relay” through Ethernet
“Communication/Download info files from relay” through
File Retrieval of relay hard disk stored files (RECOMMENDED):
Ethernet
REMINDER:
Logic programming support files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) CANNOT be retrieved directly from the relay.
It is necessary
* Either to have stored these files in the PC
* Or to have uploaded previously the files into the relay (“Communication>Upload info files to relay”)
The EnerVista 650 Setup menus structure is shown in EnerVista 650 SETUP MENUS STRUCTURE.
Unless specified, options are available in both On-line and Off-line mode.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*)
Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
The “View > Language” submenu allows the user to change the default language for the EnerVista 650 Setup program and 4
it is only enabled when the relay is not communicating and no file has been opened.
Open (**) Product Setup Front Panel NA Computer Login user Traces Instruction
Manual
ModBus About
Save As System Setup Status NA Modem (*) Change Memory EnerVista
(**) Password
Map 650 Setup
Print (**) NA
Print to file
(**) NA
Exit NA
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
Once the *.650 file with the appropriated relay model (FXGX) is selected, the program will enable the off-line options to fully
program the unit. The enabled menus in the EnerVista 650 Setup program are: File, Settings, Actual, Communication, View
and Help.
The off-line mode displays the File, Settings, Actual, Communication, View and Help submenus to program the unit.
The Actual values submenus are for structure purposes only Values are not refreshed while the relay is not communicating.
The “Save as” and ”Close” submenus are used to save the *.650 file into the computer and to close the current file. To work
in off line mode for settings and configuration edition it is not necessary to use the ”Close” option, a new *.650 can be
opened without closing the previous one. The ”Close file” option is used to clear all data in EnerVista 650 Setup program,
enabling “Language”, ”Upload firmware” and “boot code” options.
4.1.6.3 PROPERTIES
When this option is selected, the program will show a screen including the relay model information, firmware version, etc. of
the file being edited, as shown on Figure 4–8:
4.1.6.7 PRINT
In this option, the program will print the relay configuration using the PC default (active) printer on port COMx or LPT. This
option is active only in off-line mode, in file edition, and not in on-line mode, connected with the relay.
SETPOINT
Communications settings for all protocols and physical mediums.
Product Setup ModBus user map definition, fault report, oscillography, data logger and
demand settings.
System Setup General Settings, Flex Curves Definition, Breaker settings and
maintenance, and switchgear snapshot events management.
Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative Sequence
Protection Elements Current Settings. Voltage Elements settings and Power Settings
management.
Setting groups, under and overfrequency settings, synchrocheck,
Control Elements autoreclose, breaker failure, VT fuse failure, broken conductor and
locked rotor settings management.
Inputs/Outputs Contact I/O settings for all boards available in device, Remote Comms.
Configuration of Outputs, LEDs, Operations, Protection Elements,
Oscillography, Operations, Control Events, Switchgear, Inputs, Virtual
Relay Configuration Inputs, Operations and HMI. Whole relay configuration with internal relay
signals or user-definable ones as logic (virtual outputs).
4 Logic Configuration
Logic configuration graphic editor (PLC Editor). It is a PLC Project file
editor that contains all the internal drawings used to make the logic
(virtual outputs) based on IEC 61131-3 standard. Functional block
diagram (FDB).
Relay synchronization to computer clock or to user-definable date and
Clock (*) time. On-line mode only.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
e) COMMUNICATION SETTINGS
This section details the settings related to communication parameters for the different protocols available in the F650.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
Ground Current All overcurrent grouped functions for ground current. (Measured from 4th
current input)
Sensitive Ground All overcurrent grouped functions for sensitive ground current.
Current (Measured from 5th current input)
Negative Sequence
Negative sequence time overcurrent function
Current
4 Voltage Elements All under and overvoltage grouped functions for phases, neutral,
auxiliary voltage and negative sequence.
Power Forward and directional power grouped protection functions.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
4.1.7.5 INPUT/OUTPUTS
Section that contains the settings for all input and output boards and the Force Outputs and Virtual inputs activation tools.
Force Outputs (*) This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay, to facilitate
maintenance testing. On line mode only.
This menu allows operating virtual inputs. These variables are used as
inputs to logic schemes configured in the relay. Virtual inputs can be
Virtual Inputs (*)
operated in a latched mode (32 latched virtual inputs) or in Self-reset
mode (32 self reset virtual inputs).
This menu allows configuring remote inputs coming from other devices
Remote Comms. through GSSE messages.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
This section shows the settings related to inputs and outputs for the different boards available in F650 (F, G, H, J).
RELAY CONFIG
Outputs Configuration of contact output operate and reset signals for all boards.
15 LEDs fully configurable from any logical variable, contact or virtual
LEDs input. First 5 LEDs are latched by hardware, the rest are self-reset but
can be latched through PLC configuration. From the LED configuration
screen, it is possible to print the vertical LED label for the relay
Configurable operations up to 24. Operation texts, interlocks, final states,
Operations
frontal keys, time outs and masters.
This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different
Protection Elements protection elements. To block, reset, initiate the different protection
elements inputs.
Trigger and up to 16 digital channels to be included in oscillography
records, are programmable from any logical variable, contact or virtual
4 Oscillography
input. Text configuration is only for off-line mode.
NOTE: This screen is used for the configuration of digital channels and
oscillography trigger. The rest of parameters, such as function enabling/
disabling, sampling rate, number of oscillography files, etc. must be set
on the Settings>Product Setup>Oscillography menu.
Up to 128 user programmable events from any logical variable, contact
or virtual input. Possibility to display the event as an alarm on the alarms
panel. Control events are also displayed in the snapshot events
Control Events recording. 1 ms time tagging.
A control event is a logic signal associated to an operand or combination
of operands, that allows following the status of that signal.
Up to 16 configurable switchgear elements. A switchgear element can be
a breaker, a line selector switch, a grounding selector switch, a busbar
selector switch, etc. This screen allows configuration of type of contacts,
Switchgear opening and closing time, contact assignation and text for events related
to switchgear. There are 64 pre-established events for switchgear, which
correspond to opening, closing, Error01 and Error11 of the 16
programmable switchgear elements.
Up to 32 DNA bits and 6?????? bits to be transmitted to remote devices
Remote outputs over CAN using GSSE messages
Text configuration for off-line mode file management for all the contact
Inputs
inputs available in device.
Virtual Inputs Text configuration for off-line mode file management. 32 latched and 32
self reset virtual inputs.
Screen for one line diagram configuration. This menu shows a scenario
MMI (HMI-Human to draw a simplified one-line diagram of a bay in a feeder, line,
Machine Interface) transformer, etc. The menu includes a library for power elements,
metering elements, text and drawings. See an example in Figure 4–11:
The following figures show an example of the default factory configuration for F650.
LOGIC CONFIG
Header for Logic project: PLC project file containing the necessary
*.pep information relative to the relay model, logic libraries included in the
project (*.lib), graphic file name (*.aut), etc.
PLC Project file containing all the drawings used by the logic, required by
*.aut F650 relay based on IEC 61131-3 standard. Functional block diagram
(FDB).
User programmable logic objects: Library file to be included as an object
*.lib in a PLC project. Logic packages that can be stored into libraries and be
distributed in different PLC projects.
4.1.7.8 CLOCK
This menu allows to update the date and time of the relay, either synchronizing them with the PC clock, or entering the
information manually.
The menu bar in the main screen of EnerVista 650 Setup software shows the ACTUAL menu option. This option
concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering, counters information, oscillography,
events, fault locator, etc. This section shows only the structure of menus in EnerVista 650 Setup.
Table 4–16: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU:
ACTUAL
Front Panel>LEDs The relay front LEDs status is shown on this menu.
Status Protection and control status signals for all available protection functions
in device.
All metering values available in device. Primary and secondary values,
Metering frequency and phasor diagram provided.
All input and output status provided. For contact inputs and contact
Inputs/Outputs
outputs as well as virtual input and virtual output signals.
Records Only enabled in on line mode, retrieval of all the available records in
device. Snapshot events, control events, oscillography and fault reports.
4.1.8.2 STATUS
The following menu includes all the available protection status in the device.
STATUS
Up to 24 elements. OPERATION BIT XX is (0) when the configured time
Operation bits out for the operation XX expires or when success conditions are met.
And it is (1) if operation XX is executed and interlocks are fulfilled.
Breaker status (open, closed or undefined). The rest of the status signals
Breaker corresponding to the switchgear XX configured as breaker are in the
“Status>Switchgear Status>Switchgear XX” menu.
Protection Status of all the protection units in the device.
Control Elements Status of all the control units available in the device.
This screen shows a complete list of all protection and control elements
Protection Summary
in the relay, showing their status (enabled or not).
Snapshots events Summary of the snapshot events status (enabled or disabled) for
summary protection, control, inputs and outputs boards and switchgear.
Up to 256 elements. Value in SIGNED INT 16 BIT format of the reading
ModBus User Map for the selected address configured in “Settings>Product
Setup>ModBus User Map”
Up to 16 blocks of switchgear status signals for the 16 configurable
devices. Status signals such as inputs for A and B contacts, status for A
Switchgear Status and B, open and close status, error 00 and error 11, open init and close
4 init, fail to open and fail to close signals.
Internal states for calibration. Factory calibration and calibration error
Calibration
signals.
Flex curve status for A, B, C and D user curves. (0) if it is not configured,
Flex Curves (1) if it is configured. To configure a flex curve go to “Settings>System
Setup>Flex Curves” menu.
System Info This screen can monitor the system parameters and the internal status of
the Relay boot code. Not enabled by default, password required
Information related to the different records stored in the Relay, such as:
Records Status Fault reports, control events, oscillography, data logger, demand, energy,
and breaker maintenance.
SNTP-IRIG-B Information related to synchronization via IRIG_B or SNTP
Table 4–18: DIFFERENT CONTROL ACTUAL VALUES INCLUDED IN THE CONTROL ELEMENTS MENU
CONTROL
Frequency Status signals (pickups and operations) for under and overfrequency
units.
Synchrocheck Status signals for synchrocheck function (25).
Autoreclose Status signals for autoreclose function (79). Close signal, recloser status
(ready, lockout, etc), block signals after each shot.
Breaker Failure Status signals for breaker failure function (50BF).
VT Fuse Failure Fuse failure detection signal.
Broken Conductor Status signals (pickups and operations) for broken conductor (I2/I1).
Setting Groups Status signals (activations and blocks) for the relay setting group change.
By default the “setting group” setting is disabled and all the grouped
elements can be enabled at the same time.
Locked Rotor Status signals (pickups and operations) for locked rotor units.
Table 4–19: DIFFERENT PROTECTION ACTUAL VALUES INCLUDED IN THE PROTECTION MENU
PROTECTION
Protection Blocks This screen shows all the protection element blocks available. Protection
elements block signals can be configured at “Settings>Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements”.
Phase Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent,
instantaneous overcurrent and directional protection functions for phase
current.
Neutral Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent,
instantaneous overcurrent and directional protection functions for neutral
current (calculated from phases).
Ground Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent,
instantaneous overcurrent and directional protection functions for ground
current (measured from 4th current input).
Sensitive Ground Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent,
Current instantaneous overcurrent, isolated and directional protection functions
for ground current (measured from 4th current input).
Negative Sequence Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for negative sequence
Current time overcurrent function.
Thermal Model Protection status signals for thermal model. Reset, alarm and operation
signals for phases and for unit, besides the thermal image values in
Voltage
percentage for all phases and units.
Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for all voltage
4
functions, undervoltage, overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, negative
sequence overvoltage and auxiliary under and over voltage.
Power Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for forward and
directional power units.
Table 4–20: SHOWS THE ACTUAL VALUES RELATED TO RECORDING FUNCTIONS IN THE RECORDS STATUS
MENU:
RECORD
STATUS
Fault Reports This menu shows the fault report status signals, as fault report trigger,
fault date, fault type and location, besides the fault report number.
Control Events Status of the control events (if the signal configured to launch the control
event is active or not).
Oscillography Status of signals related to oscillography recording, such as status or
digital channels, oscillography trigger, number of records available, etc.
Data Logger Data logger information about oldest and newest sample time stamp,
and number of channels and days configured in data logger settings.
Demand Demand trigger and reset inputs status.
Energy Freeze, unfreeze and reset input signals for energy counters.
Breaker Maintenance All signals related to breaker maintenance, such as number of openings,
closings, (KI)2t counters, alarm signal for (KI)2t, etc.
4.1.8.3 METERING
The Metering menu includes all the measurements available in the device. Primary and secondary values, and also the
data related to the recording functions in the relay.
METERING
Primary Values Primary values measurements for currents, voltages, power, energy and
demand
Secondary Values Secondary values measurements for currents, voltages and power.
Phasor Diagram Current, voltage and sequence components.
Frequency Line and Bus frequencies.
4.1.8.4 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The Inputs/Outputs menu includes all the inputs and outputs signals available in the device. Contact and virtual type.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
4.1.8.5 RECORDS
The Records menu is only available in on line mode and includes the possibility to retrieve all the records available in the
device. By serial or Ethernet.
RECORDS (*)
Event recorder (*) Retrieval and visualization of snapshot event (all and new), control
events and alarm panel. By serial or Ethernet (ModBus RTU or TCP/IP)
Waveform capture (*) Retrieval of oscillography files, by serial or Ethernet.
Fault Report (*) Retrieval and visualization of fault report files, by serial or Ethernet.
Data logger (*) Retrieval and visualization of data logger files. Only by Ethernet.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
Option only available in on line mode, showing all the operations previously configured in the relay with their corresponding
texts.
OPERATIONS
Operation 1 (*) Entry to first operation (with its corresponding text)
... ...
Operation 24 (*) Entry to 24th operation (with its corresponding text)
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
The communication menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update
procedures available in device: firmware, boot code, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and download
info files to/from relay).
4
For more detail information go to section starting communication for communication menus description and to section for
flash memory update procedures.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
The security menu includes all the menus related to security control in EnerVista 650 Setup. EnerVista 650 Setup security
users and passwords are not related to passwords in HMI. Each security level has its own access for HMI management
and EnerVista 650 Setup management.
SECURITY
Login User (*) Log on menu for EnerVista 650 Setup. Enabled after security control has
been enabled in user management menu.
Change Password (*) Menu to change passwords and establish password recovering
questions.
User Management (*) User management dialog box.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
4 The view menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update procedures
available in device: firmware, boot code, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and download info files to/
from relay).
The ModBus memory map is detailed in the complete instruction manual (English only) and can be obtained from EnerVista
650 Setup program.
VIEW
Traces (*) To inspect ModBus communication traces between the EnerVista 650
Setup and the relay.
ModBus Memory map Complete ModBus memory map description.
Languages (**) Option to change the EnerVista 650 Setup default language. Only
available if the relay is not communicating and no file (*650) is open.
Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)
Complete instructions manual and data about EnerVista 650 Setup release.
HELP
Instructions Manual Instructions manual in the language selected in “View>Languages”
menu.
About EnerVista 650 Release version and date of EnerVista 650 Setup program.
Setup
HMI Interface
DISPLAY&LEDS
KEYPAD&SHUTTLE
FRONTPORT
4.2.1 DISPLAY
F650 units are available with two different options for the front display. The first option is an alphanumerical display of 4
lines with 20 characters each, and the second option is a graphical display of 16 lines with 40 characters each (128x240
pixels), being B the ordering code option for the text display model (basic), and M the code for the mimic display
(graphical).
The boot code and firmware versions can be seen in the relay text main screen, this screen is the default screen in the text
menu for all models: After the text “F650”, appears the relay firmware version (2.00 in the example), and between brackets
the boot program version (3.0 in the example), followed by “ General Electric”, the relay model and the default front RS232
port (COM2) communication parameters.
F6502.00(3 .0)
G eneralElectric
F 650MZD F2G1 H IR
19200N81:M OD BU S :254
The relay provides 16 LED indicators, 15 user programmable plus one non-configurable LED (READY) that shows if the
relay is in service.
Programmable LEDs are divided into groups of 5 LEDs, each of the groups having a different color. The first group of LED
indicators is latched by hardware (red color ones), usually configured for trip signals. The second group (yellow color) and
third group (green color) of LED indicators are self-reset type and will be reset once the condition has been cleared, but can
be latched using logic through PLC configuration.
The ESC key is used to reset any latched led indicator, once the condition has been cleared. Keep the ESC button pressed
for more than 3 seconds; all LEDs will light up, verifying their correct operation. When releasing the ESC key, all indicators
programmed with memory, such as tripping LEDs, will be reset.
The latched conditions can also be reset via communications using the LED reset input (to configure this signal go to
“Settings>Relay Configuration>Protection elements>LED RESET INPUT”). By default this LED reset input signal is set
to LEDS RESET operation.
4.2.3 PUSHBUTTONS
This button can be used for closing the user programmable switchgear. It is fully
programmable by the user.
This button can be used for closing the user programmable switchgear. It is fully
programmable by the user.
User programmable
User programmable
User programmable
(ESC) Escape key. When pressed during more than 3 seconds, it will test all LEDs and
reset the trip LEDs.
shuttle key or Shuttle Key (it can be both rotated and pressed): Used for selecting
menus, submenus, settings and for confirmation. Press or rotate the shuttle key to enter
the text main menu from the text standby screen.
Press the command button to switch from local to remote operations mode and vice versa. OFF status (operation inhibited
for maintenance and safety) can be reach pressing the commands pushbutton during several seconds (local-remote-off
sequence).
Figure 4–16: shows the detail of the front RS232 communication port and local/remote button access cover
4
sealing system. The sealing system is similar to the one used in energy meters, using wire and plumb seal.
High quality plastic have been used in the design to withstand extreme environmental conditions, both mechanical and
electrical, sun radiation, humidity, etc. in order to guarantee a long life for the unit.
S
ymb
ol A
ctio
n p
erfo
rme
d N
avig
atio
n inme
nu
ENT
ER P
res
sShuttleKey E
nternextlevel
4 E
L
–
S
R
C P
r
R
o
es
sE
ta
s
teS
h
cK
u
ey
ttleKe
y
E
xittopr
e
m
vio
o
u
v
sle
eu
v
p
e
a
l
n
d d
owninth
e
s
amele
vel
L R
ota
teL
e ftSh
uttleK e
y m
oveu
p inthesamele
vel
R R
ota
teRightSh
u ttleKey m
oved
ow n inth
esamele
v e
l
? M
enuse
lec
tio
n M
enuse
lec
tio
n
> M
or
em enu
stodis
pla
y M
or
em enu
stodis
pla
y
L–R
* Logotype >
M etering >
All >
<− return
a) ACTUAL VALUES
The Actual Values menu option in HMI concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering,
counters information, oscillography, events, fault locator, etc.
Table 4–30: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU:
Front Panel >
LEDs
Status >
Operation Bits
Breaker
Protection >
Protection Blocks
Phase Current
Neutral Current
Ground Current
Sens. Ground Current
Neg. Seq. Current
Thermal Model
4 Voltage
Power
Control Elements >
Frequency
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Broken Conductor
Setting Groups
Locked Rotor
Switchgear Status >
Switchgear 1
Switchgear ...
Switchgear 16
Calibration
Flex Curves
System Info
SNTP/IRIG_B
Records Status >
Fault Reports
Control Events
Oscillography
Data logger
Demand
Energy
Breaker Maintenan.
Metering >
Primary Values >
Current
Voltage
Power
Energy
Demand
Secondary Values >
Current
Voltage
Power
Phasor Diagram
Frequency
Inputs/Outputs >
Contact Inputs >
Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output St. >
Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output Op. >
Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output Rs. >
Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
IO Board Status
Virtual Inputs >
Virtual Inp.Latched
Virtual Inp.SR
Virtual Outputs
Remote Outputs > 4
DNA
User St
Remote Inputs >
Remote Input
Remote Devices
Analog Inputs >
Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
To enter this menu press the shuttle key when the option Actual Values is selected in main menu. A secondary level will be
displayed with different sublevels as shown on Table 4–30:. Rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving up and right for moving
down) select the next level to be displayed, press the shuttle key again to enter in next level and press ESC key to return to
previous level if desired. This navigation will be performed the same for all the menus in Actual Values. Once the last
sublevel is reached, move up and down to visualize the actual values selected.
One example of data screen for actual values is shown in Figure 4–18:.
First Line: Header of last level in actual values (Phase Current in the example)
Second Line: Data identifier (in the example PH IOC1 HIGH A, is the pickup signal for the first instantaneous
overcurrent function level high for phase A).
Third line: Status of the displayed actual value.
Fourth Line: Relative position in the menu (it is the first value of 114)
P haseCurrent
PHIO C 1HIGHAP KP
OFF
(1/114)
F 6 5 0 2 .0 0 (3 .0 ) Press shuttle key from the default main screen and enter in the main text menu.
G e n e r a l E le c tr ic
F 6 5 0 M Z D F 2 G 1 H IR
19200N 81: M O D B U S : 254
E N T E R
E SC
Move the shuttle key until a single scroll bar character appears in the left part of
A c tu a l V a lu e s
Snapshot event header.
? S n ap sh o t even t
F a u lt r e p o r t
V ie w s e ttin g s
Press shuttle key to enter in the snapshot events menu
E N T E R
E SC
B r e a k e r C lo s e d O N > Select the snapshot event to display using the shuttle key (left and right to move up
S t: O N (4 /4 7 9 )
T im e : 1 6 :3 5 :0 2 .0 2 7
and down inside the recorded snapshot events).
4
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5
L –R
Is o la te d G n d 3 B lo c k > Once selected the snapshot event, identifier , status, date and time will be displayed.
S t: O F F (5 /4 7 9 ) In the second line St: is showing the status and the relative snapshot index from the
T im e : 1 6 :3 5 :0 1 .9 9 5 whole recorded number. Third and fourth lines are used to display the time and date
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 of the snapshot event.
E N T E R
E SC
Ia 0 .0 0 0 V ab 0 .0 0 0 Pressing the shuttle key the metering screen for the snapshot event will be
Ib 0 .0 0 0 V b c 0 .0 0 0 displayed.
Ic 0 .0 0 0 V ca 0 .0 0 0
To exit from this screen press the ESC key and return to the snapshot events menu.
Ig 0 .0 0 0 V 0 0 .0 0 0
4 produced, and both the general information and the metering screens can be viewed for each fault. Displayed information
starts in the most recent fault, and the user can switch to another fault by rotating the shuttle key.
Displayed information is stored in the relay volatile memory, so if the relay is turned off this information will be lost, as well
as if a “Clear Fault Report” command is executed. However, fault reports stored in the relay non-volatile memory will
remain after the Fault reset, and they can be obtained from the relay using EnerVista 650 Setup software, at the
“Actual>Records>Fault report” menu.
If there is no fault report available through the display, the relay will show a “Fault report not available” message.
A c tu a l V a lu e s
S napshot event Select the Fault report menu in text menu
* F a u lt r e p o r t
V ie w s e ttin g s
E N T E R
E SC
Fa u lt R e p o rt # 1 If there is more than one fault record rotate the shuttle key and select the desired
N A F d is t: 0 .0 0 record to be displayed.
T im e : 0 9 :2 1 :4 0 .5 4 5
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5
L –R
Fa u lt R e p o rt # 2 First screen with general fault information: Fault report #number, fault type, distance
N A F d is t: 0 .0 0 and date and time.
T im e : 0 9 :2 2 :0 3 .0 4 7
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 4
E N T E R
E SC
F a u lt R e p o r t # 2
Ia 0 .0 0 V ab 0 .0 0 Second screen with metering data for that fault record. All this data is a summary
Ib 0 .0 0 V bc 0 .0 0 from the fault report file that can be retrieved via EnerVista 650 Setup software.
Ic 0 .0 0 V ca 0 .0 0
4 DNP3 Slave 2
DNP3 Slave 3
IEC 870-5-104
SNTP
Fault Report
Oscillography
Demand
System Setup >
General Settings
Breaker >
Breaker Settings
Breaker Maintenance
Protection Element >
Phase Current >
Phase TOC High >
Phase TOC High 1
Phase TOC High 2
Phase TOC High 3
Phase TOC Low >
Phase TOC Low 1
Phase TOC Low 2
Phase TOC Low 3
Phase IOC High >
Phase IOC High 1
Phase IOC High 2
Phase IOC High 3
Phase IOC Low >
Phase IOC Low 1
Phase IOC Low 2
Phase IOC Low 3
Phase Directional >
Phase Directional 1
Phase Directional 2
Phase Directional 3
Thermal Model >
Thermal Model 1
P r e s s In tr o Once all settings inside the group have been modified, go to the last screen rotating
to s a v e s e ttin g s the shuttle key and press Intro. At this moment of time, the new settings will be
active in the relay.
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 Time: Hour:Minutes:Seconds
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 :5 4 After storing the value for Year, Month will appear between brackets and can be 4
S u n d a y modified
⇒
‘Month’
‘Y e a r ’ Date: Day/<Month>/Year
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /< 2 0 0 5 >
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 :5 4 Time: Hour:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Month, Day will appear between brackets and can be
⇒ modified
‘M o n th ’ ‘Day’
D a te : 1 0 /< J u n > /2 0 0 5
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 :5 4 Date: <Day>/Month/Year
Time: Hour:Minutes:Seconds
⇒ After storing the value for Day, Hour will appear between brackets and can be
‘D a y ’ modified
D a te : < 1 0 > /J u n /2 0 0 5 ‘Hour’
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 :5 4
Date: Day/Month/Year
⇒ Time: <Hour>:Minutes:Seconds
‘H o u r ’ After storing the value for Hour, Minutes will appear between brackets and can be
D a te : 0 7 /N o v /2 0 0 4 modified
T im e : < 1 4 > :3 9 :5 4
‘Minute’
⇒ Date: Day/Month/Year
‘M in u te ’ Time: Hour:<Minute>:Seconds
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 After storing the value for Minutes, Seconds will appear between brackets and can
T im e : 1 4 :< 3 9 > :5 4 be modified
‘Second’
⇒
Date: Day/Month/Year
‘S e c o n d ’
D a te : 1 0 /J u n /2 0 0 5 Time: Hour: Minute:<Seconds>
T im e : 1 4 :3 9 : < 5 4 >
Once this sequence is completed, these values will remain stored in the relay, and
the display will show again the date at the bottom of the text screen.
4.2.5.8 COMMANDS
Commands are configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, and they can be executed using the pushbuttons on the relay front.
Using EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user can configure up to 24 commands with a descriptive text. When executing
the operation from the relay front, the operation description text will be displayed.
Example of commands (operations) executions via HMI
Press the shuttle key in the menu commands when it is selected in the display ().
C h an g e S e ttin g s
D a te & T im e
* C o m m an d s
P assw o rd
E N T E R
E SC
C o m m an d :
C L O S E B R E A K E R All the previously configured commands will be displayed. Rotate the shuttle key
4 move through the available commands. Press ESC to return to previous level.
L –R
C o m m an d :
O P E N B R E A K E R Press shuttle key to pre-select the operation to be executed
E N T E R
E SC
P u s h ‘In tr o ” fo r When the message “Push Intro for Confirmation” appears, press the shuttle key to
C o n fir m a tio n confirm the commands that will be performed.
E N T E R
E SC
C o m m an d
C o m p le te d Once the commands has been performed or the time out has expired the
“Command completed” message will appear in the display.
4.2.5.9 PASSWORDS
F650 units incorporate independent passwords for protection and control, in order to prevent unauthorized keypad and
display access to the relay.
Settings Password:
This password allows restricting access to settings changes in the relay protection elements.
Commands Password:
This password is required for executing operation commands through the keypad and display.
If the Commands Password is activated, when the user tries to execute an operation, the relay will request this password,
and in case of using the single-line diagram for graphical display models, all objects will not be operational until this
password is entered, either logging in Login Pwd Commands, or entering the password in the Commands menu.
Relay settings view, measures, and other monitored information are not password-protected, and they can be accessed by
all users.
Access to the password menu is located at the Password option in the relay text menu. This menu includes the following
options:
"Login Pwd Settings"
"Logout Pwd Settings" 4
"Change Pwd Settings"
"Login Pwd Commands"
"Logout Pwd Commands"
"Change Pwd Commands"
"Forgot Password?"
Among the available options in this menu, there are three types of functionality:
Login: For entering the password, either for settings or commands, and enable access to settings or
commands. Once entering the password the relay is no longer password protected, and access is
enabled to settings modification or commands execution.
Logout: Once the necessary setting changes or operation commands have been executed, the user can log
out, so that the relay is password protected again.
Change: This menu allows setting or modifying the desired password.
Forgot Password: This menu provides the encrypted password, so that it can be recovered if the user loses or forgets
it.
Passwords are restricted for Settings change and Commands execution. To password-protect the relay, it is first necessary
to set the desired password, using the corresponding “Change Pwd ...” menu. The default password is 0000. This
password provides access to the whole relay functionality.
Once a new password has been set, the user must log in to access the protected functionality; otherwise, the relay will
request the password when trying to change settings or execute commands. Once the password is entered the relay is
unprotected (as if the user had logged in), and the user must log out to protect again the relay.
a) PASSWORD RANGE
The valid range for F650 passwords is a number from 0000 to 9999.
The default password is 0000, which provides access to the whole relay functionality. This is the default option for enabling
relay use without using passwords.
Logotype
This option selects as main screen the relay logotype including the firmware and boot code versions, the relay model and
the communication parameters for local port COM2.
F6502.00(3 .0)
G eneralElectric
F 650MZD F2G1 H IR
19200N81:M OD BU S :254
The relay display offers the possibility to select the default language for the relay. For this purpose, the user must access
the “Select language” menu located at the end of the main menu through the HMI. This menu allows the user to set the
default language of the relay between English (always available) and second language selected in the relay model. (see
section BUSCAR ORIGEN REFERENCIA 2.3. ).
For example one relay in French language (e.g. F650MZDF2G1HIRF) can be displayed in French or in English only by
changing the language setting in HMI. It is necessary to switch off and on the relay to start working with the new language
configuration in the relay. In EnerVista 650 Setup it is possible to select the language for the software (View>Languages).
Example of language selection in HMI
C om m ands Press the shuttle key to enter the select language menu.
P a s s w o rd
Depending on the relay model there will be available different kind of language
S e le c t M a in S c r e e n
selections: English/French, English/ Russian, etc.
* S e le c t L a n g u a g e
4 ENTER
ESC
* E n g lis h
F re n c h Rotate the shuttle key to select the desired language and press it to store the
< − re tu rn selection in the relay
ENTER
ESC
⇐
Language changed.
P le a s e r e b o o t Once the new language has been selected it is necessary to reboot the relay in
th e r e la y . order to start working with the new language in the device.
The bottom of the display shows a legend that indicates the possible selections that can be made from this
screen.
Esc: Menu.Intro: Next.L-R: Select.
4
Figure 4–28: METERING SCREEN
As in the rest of graphical display screens, the bottom part shows a legend that indicates the possible options for the user.
In this case, the options are:
Intro: Next.Esc: Prev.L-R: Scroll.
Intro: Next.
Pressing the shuttle key the user accesses the next screen, in this case the ALL EVENTS screen.
Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key the user returns to the previous screen (One-line diagram)
L-R: Scroll.
Rotating the shuttle key to the left (L) or right (R) the user can access all the Metering values in the screen. Rotating the
shuttle key left will move up in the screen, and rotating right will move down.
This legend means that there are a total of 479 events stored in the relay, and that the cursor is located on event number 1.
The information shown on this screen for each event is as follows:
“Hour:Minute:Second:Millisecond” “Event text” “Event status(ON/OFF)”
Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key, the user returns to the previous screen (Metering screen)
Intro: Menu.
Pressing the shuttle key, the user accesses the Events menu that offers the following options at the bottom of the screen:
next prev reload details At
To access the different options in the snapshot events graphic menu the user must move the cursor from left to right. The
selected option will be displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected option, the user must press
again the shuttle key.
<NEXT>
The user accesses the next available graphic screen (Events – New)
<PREV>
This option returns to the general events graphic menu (All Events)
<RELOAD>
This option updates all events stored in the relay and returns to the general events screen.
<DETAILS>
The Details screen provides access to metering values, and date and time related with the event.
The top of the screen displays a legend with the event text, followed by the date and time, the event status (ON or
OFF), and the event index number related to the complete list of events in the relay, for example (1/479). The rest of
information provided by the Details screen corresponds to the relay measures in the moment of the event. Metering
values provided in the events are secondary, and voltage values correspond to phase-to-ground voltage.
Ready LED ON
Date: 10/Jun/2005 St:ON
Time: 16:11:08.035 (1/479)
Intro: Meters.
To access the metering values in the moment of the event, the user must press the shuttle key. A new metering screen
will be displayed, containing the primary metering values in the snapshot event, such as:
Once inside the Metering screen, a new legend will be shown for each event (Intro or ESC: Prev. L-R: Scroll); this
legend indicates that by pressing ESC or the shuttle key, the system will return to the Event Detail screen, and rotating
the shuttle key the user will access all the metering values contained in the metering screen of the considered event.
ESC: Prev.
If the user presses the ESC key from the event detail screen, the system will return to the all events screen.
L-R: Scroll.
Rotating the shuttle key left (L) or right (R) moves among all the events contained in the all events screen, allowing a
preview of the details for each of them.
<AT>
When this option is selected, the system marks the event where the cursor is located. A relative time stamp is
performed, in such a way that the selected event, marked with an asterisk (*) between the time and the event name is
set with a relative time of 00:00:00:000 on the top line of the event screen, together with its relative index, and the rest
of events in the screen will show a date/time that relates to the marked event. This operation mode allows a quick
inspection of the relative time passed between several events, which is very useful for analyzing events in the field.
The corresponding legend to this relative event-marking screen is as follows:
Esc: Out At. Intro: Tag event.
Esc: Out At.
The relative event marking is eliminated and the system returns to the general events screen.
Intro: Tag event.
If the user places the cursor on a different event by rotating the shuttle key left or right, pressing the shuttle key
will change the relative mark to that new event.
4
4.2.6.4 NEW EVENTS SCREEN
This screen shows the new events that have been produced in the relay since the last time the New Events screen was
read. The top of the screen shows a “New Events” legend, and the relative and total number of events contained.
Navigation through the different menus in this New Events screen is similar to the one described in the previous section for
All Events. The main difference is that in the case of new events it is necessary to select the RELOAD submenu to update
the screen with new events that have been produced, while in the All Events screen, this refreshment is automatic.
After the new events have been read, if the user selects again the Reload menu, the system will show a <No new events
available.> message, indicating that there are no more new events available since the last reading.
First line shows the relative and total number of alarms existing in that screen. The relative number refers to the alarm on
which the cursor is located, and the total number refers to the total amount of alarms available. The second line on this
screen shows an index that indicates the number of the configured control event that corresponds to the displayed alarm,
followed by the alarm text configured in the Control Events menu inside the Relay Configuration option
(“Settings>Relay Configuration>Control Events”).
<ACK ALL>
This option acknowledges all alarms. Alarm acknowledgement through the graphic HMI is considered as through
communication port COM2, as it is considered to be Local in both cases.
When an alarm has been acknowledged, a selection mark will appear to the right of its status. Inactive alarms will
disappear from the screen once they are acknowledged.
IO Card.
Type: 2, Nº IN 8, Nº OUT8 4
>F<
G
H
J
4 <NEXT>
This option brings the system back to the one-line diagram.
<VIEW>
This option shows the real status of all inputs and outputs in the selected board. Depending on the type of board, with
or without supervision, the screen will vary to get adapted to the characteristics of each board.
The first line of this screen shows the slot where the board is located, F, G, H or J, and the type of board, 2 if it includes
supervision (8 inputs, 8 outputs, and 4 supervision circuits), or 1 if it is a mixed board (without supervision) with 16
digital inputs and 8 outputs. The view menu differentiates inputs and outputs; the active status (ON) is represented by
the lighting of the corresponding input or output.
The legend at the bottom of the screen indicates how to navigate:
Esc: Prev. Intro: Menu. L-R: Chg Card
Esc: Prev.
Returns to the general I/O screen
Intro: Menu.
Provides access to the I/O menu (next, view, test input, test output).
L-R: Chg Card
Moving the shuttle key to the left or right provides access to the status of inputs/outputs for the different boards
available in the relay.
<TEST INPUT>
This option allows testing the input activation (in emulation mode). The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but in this case the user can operate the different relay inputs.
This screen shows the Input name lit up, showing that this is an Input emulation mode.
The first relay input will appear blinking and between brackets; the user can select a different input by rotating the
shuttle key. When the shuttle key is pressed, the selected input will be activated. Navigation through this screen is
indicated by the following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Intro: Chg Input.
<TEST OUTPUT>
This option allows testing the output activation in emulation mode. The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but in this case the user can operate the different relay contact outputs to test the wiring.
This screen shows the Output name lit up, showing that this is an output emulation mode.
The first relay output will appear blinking and between brackets; the user can select a different output by rotating the
shuttle key. When the shuttle key is pressed, the selected output will be activated. Navigation through this screen is
indicated by the following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Intro: Chg Output.
Esc: Exit Text.
The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
4
Intro: Chg Output.
Pressing the shuttle keyshuttle key on the blinking output, this output will be activated in emulation mode.
Note: Output emulation can be executed through the TEST OUTPUT tool on the graphic display, and also
through communications using EnerVista 650 Setup software for all F650 models.
L-R: Chg Card
Rotating the shuttle key allows to change the selected I/O board in the main I/O screen.
The web server in the F650 can be accessed running the Windows explorer, and keying http://xxx.xxx.xx.xxx, being
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx the relay IP address, which must be configured in Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings
> Ethernet .
The main screen of the F650 web server shows the different monitoring possibilities for snapshot events, events, alarms,
oscillography, fault reports, data logger and metering values provided by the relay through the web.
In order to access the different functions provided by the web server, the user must simply click on the list name on the left
side of the screen.
The web server (for version 1.70 and higher ones) allows the user to visualize the different web server screen languages:
English, French, Spanish and Russian by pressing the language button on the top right corner of the main window. Take
into account that this selection only changes the language in the web server screen, all the relay texts, such as snapshot
events, control events, etc. will be the in the language selected in the relay (see section 4.2.5.11 in this manual).
The Snapshot events screen shows all Snapshot events produced in the relay. This screen is refreshed automatically every
minute.
The information provided in this screen includes: first, the relative event index, the lowest index corresponding to the most
recent event; next, the event text that shows the reason for the event, its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF), and finally
the date and time when the event was produced.
The bottom of the screen shows a Metering screen; clicking on one of the events, the associated metering
values will be shown on that screen.
The control events screen provides access to all events that have been configured in the Control Events screen inside the
Relay Configuration menu of EnerVista 650 Setup.
Unlike the case of Snapshot events, in this screen the highest index corresponds to the most recent event. The information
provided is the control event index, the text that has been associated to such event when configured, its status, active (ON)
or inactive (OFF), and its date and time.
4.3.4 ALARMS
The alarms screen provides access to alarms configured in the relay. As in the case of snapshot events and control events,
this screen allows only to view the alarms, but not to acknowledge them.
4.3.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY
The oscillography screen allows obtaining from the relay available oscillography records in that moment.
This screen includes two windows. The first window shows oscillography records available in the relay,
identified by an index, being the highest index the most recent record (oscillography record No 6 in the
example below).
Clicking on the Home option, the system will return to the web server main screen.
The fault report screen provides access to the last 10 fault reports obtained by the relay. These records are stored
according to an index that marks their position among all records produced in the relay, with a range from 1 to 999,
returning to 1 in case of exceeding the limit of 999. As in the case of oscillography records, the highest index corresponds
to the most recent record.
In the fault report, oscillography and data logger screens, the system will request acceptance of a safety-warning message.
The information provided in this screen includes the date and time when the fault was registered, fault calculations such as
distance to the fault, type of fault, date and time, and the line parameters, as well as the recloser and breaker status during
the fault.
This screen shows also prefault and fault voltage and current primary values. At the top of the screen, associated to the
trigger event number there is a button labeled as INFO. This button displays at the bottom of the screen the events
produced before and after the fault report trigger, so that the user has very useful information about the moment when the
fault was produced.
To obtain a text file with all the fault report information, press the Download option and save the file in the computer.
The data logger screen allows viewing the data logger first and last value retrieval date and allows
downloading the data record files in Comtrade format, by pressing the Download option. Stored files can be
viewed later using any Comtrade format viewer.
4.3.8 METERING
This screen includes the 53 primary metering values provided by the relay display.
Table 5–1: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF SETPOINTS MAIN MENU IN ENERVISTA 650 SETUP:
Product Setup
Communication setpoints
Serial Ports
Network (Ethernet)
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave
IEC 870-5-104
ModBus User Map
Fault Report
Oscillography
Data Logger
Demand
System Setup
General setpoints
Flex Curves
Breaker
Breaker setpoints
Breaker Maintenance
Switchgear
Protection Elements
Phase Current
Phase TOC High 5
Phase TOC Low
Phase IOC High
Phase IOC Low
Phase Directional
Thermal Model
Neutral Current
Ground Current
Ground TOC
Ground IOC
Ground Directional
Sensitive Ground Current
Sensitive Ground TOC
Sensitive Ground IOC
Isolated Ground IOC
Sensitive Ground Directional
Negative Sequence Current
Negative Sequence TOC
Voltage Elements
Phase UV
Phase OV
Neutral OV High
Neutral OV Low
Negative Sequence OV
Auxiliary OV
Auxiliary UV
Power
Forward Power
Directional Power
Control Elements
setpoint Group
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Broken Conductor
Input/Outputs
Contact I/O
Board F
Board G
Board H
Board J
Virtual Inputs
Latched Virtual Inputs
Self-Reset Virtual Inputs
5.2.3.1 OVERVIEW
The fault report module defines the type of fault (three-phase, phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground), and the distance to the
fault. The fault activation signal (FAULT REPORT TRIGG) is programmed at “Setpoint > Relay Configuration >
Protection Elements”.
The fault report provides fault date, fault type, fault location information, and the index of the last fault report produced
(Fault Report Number) for the last fault produced.
Information referred to the last ten faults is stored as fault report and available to the user through EnerVista 650 Setup
software or the web server application. Each fault report includes the following information:
• Fault date and time
• Pre-fault current and voltage in primary values
Function permission (Function): Enabling this setpoint allows to create a fault report when the FAULT REPORT TRIGG
is activated.
Positive sequence impedance module (Pos Seq Module): Value in ohms of the line positive sequence impedance
module.
Positive sequence impedance Angle (Pos Seq Angle): Value in degrees of the line positive sequence angle.
Zero sequence impedance module (Zero Seq Module): Value in ohms of the line zero sequence impedance module.
Zero sequence impedance Angle (Zero Seq Angle): Value in degrees of the line zero sequence angle.
Line Length: The metering unit can be kilometers or miles.
Show Fault On HMI: This setpoint enables or disables the option to display faults on the Relay HMI.
Snapshot Events: This setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the fault report unit.
States associated to the fault report (“Actual >Metering>Records Status>Fault Reports”), are shown on Table 5–9:
Table 5–9: FAULT REPORT STATES
FAULT REPORT STATES
FAULT REPORT TRIGG
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS
FAULT DATE
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT REPORT NUMBER
FAULT REPORT TRIGG: The activation of this state initiates the calculation of the fault location and the generation of the
corresponding report.
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: The activation of this state produces the removal of all faults stored in the relay. Additionally, all
active faults on the HMI display will be acknowledged. This signal is programmed at “setpoints>Relay
Configuration>Protection Elements”.
FAULT DATE: Date and time of the last fault produced.
FAULT TYPE: Type of the last fault produced (3PHASE, AG, BG, CG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, NAF). NAF indicates
that the type of fault has not been calculated.
FAULT LOCATION: Calculated distance to the last fault (the metering unit will be the same used for setpoint the line
length).
FAULT REPORT NUMBER: Number of the fault report file saved in the relay non-volatile memory, associated to the last
fault produced.
5.2.4 OSCILLOGRAPHY
5.2.4.1 OVERVIEW
F650 units allocate 1-Mbyte of memory for storing oscillography records in RAM memory. These oscillography records are
restored in a non-volatile memory (relay Flash memory).
Oscillography records are stored in COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999 standard format.
The oscillography module is in charge of storing instantaneous values of the 9 analog signals and the 16 digital signals
programmable at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Oscillography in fault conditions (OSCILLO TRIGGER signal
activation).
All oscillography records store all analog signals (fixed) plus 16 digital signals (programmable). The order of storage in the
case of analog signals is as follows:
Analog 1IA channel.
The 16 digital channels and the oscillography trigger signal are programmable using EnerVista 650 Setup software at
Setpoint > Relay configuration > Oscillography. Each digital channel can be associated to a single status or to a logic
status. In this last case, the logic must be configured using the PLC Editor tool at Setpoint > Logic Configuration inside
EnerVista 650 Setup, and its output must be associated to a virtual output. Then, this output must be associated to the
digital channel. The oscillography trigger signal can be a single status or a configured logic. The relay default configuration
associates this signal to Virtual Output 83, which corresponds to the logic associated to the general trip of protection
elements.
Function Permission (Function): Enabling this setpoint allows to create an oscillography record when the “TRIGGER
OSCILLO” signal is activated.
Trigger Position: This setpoint defines the prefault data (in percentage) stored every time a new oscillo is produced.
Samples/Cycle: This setpoint defines the number of samples per cycle stored in each oscillography record. Please see
example below.
Maximum Number of Oscillos (Max. Number Osc.): 1 to 20 oscillography records can be selected. The capacity of each
record will depend on the capacity = 1Mbyte / Max. Number Osc. This capacity is divided in 9 measures * 4 bytes/measure
+ 2 digital bytes = 38 bytes per stored sample. Please refer to example below.
Automatic Overwrite: This setpoint allows chained oscillographies during the fault (TRIGGER OSCILLO signal
activation). The maximum allowed value to be stored as a chained oscillography is 1 Mbyte. In this case, even if the trip
continues during a time longer than the associated to 1 Mbyte of memory, the relay will stop storing oscillography in RAM
memory until the complete record has been saved in non-volatile memory. The oscillography module will be reset once the
Mbyte has been completely stored in Flash memory and the TRIGGER OSCILLO state is deactivated.
Snapshot Events: This setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the oscillography unit.
EXAMPLE
For a Max. Number Osc. of 4, each record will store 1Mbyte / 4 = 262144 bytes.
For this example, the number of samples per oscillography record is 262144 bytes / 38 bytes = 6898 samples per stored
oscillo.
If we set the relay to 64 samples per cycle, each record will store up to 6898 / 64 = 107.78 signal cycles. This value
expressed in terms of time would be:
For 50 Hz: 107.78 cycles x 20 ms/cycle =2.155 seconds.
For 60 Hz: 107.78 cycles x 16.67 ms/cycle =1.796 seconds.
States associated to the oscillography module (“Actual >Metering>Records Status>Oscillography”), are shown in Table
5–11:
Table 5–11: OSCILLOGRAPHY STATES
OSCILLOGRAPHY STATES
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
OSC DIG CHANNEL 5
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6 5
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
OSC DIG CHANNEL 8
OSC DIG CHANNEL 9
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
OSCILLO TRIGGER
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS
CYCLES PER RECORD
AVAILABLE RECORDS
OSC DIGITAL CHANNEL XX: These states are configured at “setpoints>Relay configuration>Oscillography”. Each of
these states can be associated to any protection state or to any virtual output. Each oscillography record will reflect the
changes experienced by this state during the record.
OSCILLO TRIGGER: The activation of this state will produce the oscillography record capture. Each record will contain a
percentage of its capacity to store prefault information. This percentage can be selected in the Trigger Position setpoint,
and the rest of the record capacity will store post-fault information.
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: This is the number of the most recent oscillography record stored in the relay in COMTRADE
format. The range is 0 to 999.
CYCLES PER RECORD: This state contains the number of cycles that will be stored in each oscillography record.
Although the number of cycles can be a decimal digit, the record will represent only the integer part.
AVAILABLE RECORDS: This is the number of records in COMTRADE format stored in the relay, which can be retrieved
by serial communication (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp). The range is 0 to 20.
The F650 data logger can store information of up to 16 analog channels, among all channels available in the relay, with a
sampling rate selectable by setpoint. The memory capacity of the data logger is fixed, 64 Kbytes, two bytes per analog
5 measure. Selected channels will take all the available memory space. Therefore, the storage days will depend on the
selected number of channels and sampling rate.
Function permission (Function):Enabling this setpoint allows to start storing analog channel information programmed in
this tool.
Data Logger Rate: the data logger can be configured in rates of 1 second, and 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 and 60 minutes
Data Logger Analog Channel X (Data Logger Chnl X): Analog Channels programmable in the data logger. The X value
has a range from 0 to 16.
Any setpoint change in the Data Logger will erase all the stored information.
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:Date/time state type with 6 characters. This is the time that corresponds to the oldest sample.
This value will remain constant until the available memory capacity is exceeded. At that time, this value will change
according to the sampling rate (Data Logger Rate).
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: Date/time state type with 6 characters. This is the time when the most recent sample was taken.
This value advanced in the time period defined by the sample rate setpoint.
If no channel has been selected, these setpoints remain with a static value.
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS:This state shows the number of Channels Selected by setpoint.
DATA LOGGER DAYS:This state shows the number of days that can be stored in the associated data file. It depends on
the Data Logger Rate setpoint, and on the number of channels selected.
5
5.2.5.3 DATA LOGGER FILES FORMAT AND RETRIEVAL
File Retrieval
Data logger files can be retrieved using EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
For obtaining data logger files using EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user must access “Actual>Records>Data
Logger”. The top of the window shows the date when the oldest sample was taken, and then the date when the newest
sample was taken.
This screen shows the measures stored for the different channels through the time.
Clicking on the “Download” button, all the information contained in the file can be read.
Clicking on the “Save” button, the data logger files (*.DAT, *.CFG) are retrieved in COMTRADE format, and saved by
default in folder “..\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc”, using “DLGxxx.DAT”, “DLGxxx.CFG” names, where xxx is the
corresponding record number. Data logger files can be retrieved only by Ethernet.
File Format
Data logger information is made of two text files: configuration file (datalogger.cfg), and data file (datalogger.dat).
5.2.6 DEMAND
Different integration methods can be selected to calculate current and power values.
Calculated demand values are as follows:
Function permission (Function): Enabling this setpoint allows to start the demand function.
Demand Method for Current values (CRNT Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for current
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling Demand.
Demand Method for Power values (POWER Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for power
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling Demand.
Demand Interval: Integration time, with a range of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes. Measure integration is performed in the
period adjusted in the Demand Interval setpoint.
Demand Trigger: Operation mode selection for the Block Interval calculation method. This operation mode depends on
the Trigger Enabled setpoint. If trigger enabled is set as disabled, measure integration is made in the Demand Interval
period. IF trigger enabled is set as enabled, measure integration is made during the time interval between two consecutive
pulses of the input assigned to the demand, DEMAND TRIGGER INP, at Setpoint > Relay configuration > Protection
Elements
Snapshot Events: This setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the demand unit.
5
– kt
d(t) = D(1 – e )
Where:
DInput signal (constant).
d(t) Demand value after applying the input value during time t (in minutes)
K 2.3 / setpoint time d(t) reaches 90% of the signal entered in this time
If we assume that the input signal is monotonous increasing (each new value is higher than the previous value), with an
initial value of D0, different from zero, the previous equation becomes:
D = ( VS – D0 )
Being D0 the demand value in the moment when the input signal starts to increase.
If the input signal decreases, time t restarts at 0 and the equation to be applied (cooling) will be:
– kt
d ( t ) = D0 – ( D0 – VS ) ( 1 – e )
1.2
0.8
0.6
Input
0.4
0.2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0.2
Tiempo(minutos)
1,2
0,8
Demanda %
0,6
0,4
0,2
-0,2
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
5
Tiempo (minutos)
Respuesta "Caractaerística Exponencial Térmica"
1.2
0.8
Demanda%
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0.2
Tiempo (minutos)
Respuesta "Característica Block interval"
1.2
0.8
Demanda %
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0.2
Tiempo (minutos)
Respuesta "Característica Rolling"
The maximum demand value is stored in non-volatile memory, and it is not cleared when the relay is turned off. When the
relay is turned on again, the maximum values are updated.
States associated to the demand (“Actual>Metering>Records Status>Demand”) are the following:
5.3SYSTEM SETUP
This section shows the setpoints related to the system setup definition.
This section determines the unit configuration regarding its connection to the power system.
Access to these setpoints using EnerVista 650 Setup software is at Setpoint > System Setup > General setpoints.
The corresponding setpoints are shown on the table below:
Table 5–19: GENERAL SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > GENERAL SETPOINTS
setpoint Description Name Default Value Step Range
Phase CT ratio Phase CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Ground CT ratio Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Sensitive ground CT ratio Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT ratio Phase VT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT connection Phase VT Connection WYE N/A [WYE – DELTA]
Rated voltage Nominal Voltage 100.0 0.1 [1.0 : 250.0]
Rated Frequency Nominal Frequency 50 Hz Hz [50-60]
Phase rotation Phase Rotation ABC N/A [ABC – ACB]
Frequency reference Frequency Reference VI N/A [VI-VII-VIII]
Auxiliary Voltage Auxiliary Voltage VX N/A [VX – VN]
5 Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The system rated voltage is used as reference by the voltage restraint in the phase timed overcurrent element.
The Frequency reference marks the voltage channel to which the system Frequency is measured.
The auxiliary voltage setpoint can be selected between VN and VX.
VN means that the V0 voltage value used by the neutral, ground, and sensitive ground directional elements, as well as
59NH and 59NL elements is going to be measured directly from the fourth voltage transformer of the F650 [A1-A12]. In this
case, the synchronism element will be disabled, as the busbar voltage necessary for its operation would not be available.
If VX is selected in the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint, the measured voltage would be the busbar voltage used for the
synchronism element, in this case the zero sequence voltage used by the neutral, ground and sensitive ground directional
elements. 59N will be calculated from the phase voltages.
The relay incorporates 4 user curves called Flex Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user
in “setpoints>System Setup>Flex Curves” menu in EnerVista 650 Setup. User defined flex curves can be selected as an
operation curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the relay.
In the flex curves menu there are 120 point to define a user curve. 40 point for reset (from 0 to 0.98 times the pickup value)
and 80 for operate (from 1.03 to 20 times the pickup).
Table 5–20: FLEX CURVE SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > FLEX CURVES
FLEX CURVES A > FLEX CURVES B> FLEX CURVES C > FLEX CURVES D
setpoint Description Name Default Value Step Range
Values for reset points 0.00 pkp Time 0.00xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for reset points 0.05 pkp Time 0.05xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … … …
Values for reset points 0.97 pkp Time 0.97xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for reset points 0.98 pkp Time 0.98xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for operation points 1.03 pkp Time 1.03xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for operation points 1.05 pkp Time 1.05xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … … …
Values for operation points 19.50 pkp Time 19.50xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Values for operation points 20.00 pkp Time 20.00xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
The definition of the curve points can be introduced directly in the Flex Curve setpoints menu or create them using the
5
graphical tool provided by pressing “Edit Curve” in the Flex curves menu.
In the user curve edition screen (see Figure 5–2:), a base curve can be selected, from the Standard Curves menu, as
reference among all the curves implemented in the relay. This curve will be used as a template to create the user curve.
Once the standard curve is viewed, it is possible to make the user curve (operate, reset or both) reconcile the standard
curve, using the Flex curve > set flex curve from the standard curve, and then modifying any of the points by editing in
the table the corresponding value.
The user can also view a different curve model to the one the FlexCurve has been adapted to, and compare both models to
adopt the most appropriate values in each case. If once the user curve has been configured the user wants to store the
information, the “Flex Curve > Exit with Data” menu must be selected. If the results are not to be saved, the Exit without
Data option must be selected. Once the configured curve point values have been stored, for these values to be definitely
stored in the FlexCurve, the information must be saved in the FlexCurve general menu, by clicking on the “Store” option.
This way the selected user curve is definitely stored, so that it can be used by any of the time overcurrent elements
available in the relay.
5.3.3 BREAKER
BREAKER setpointS (Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker setpoints)
Table 5–21: BREAKER SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER > BREAKER SETPOINTS
setpoint Description Name Default Step Range
Value
Number of Switchgear selected as breaker Number of Switchgear 1 1 [1 : 16]
Maximum value of KI2t Maximum KI2t 9999.99 0.01(KA)2 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
KI2t integration time KI2t Integ. Time 0.03 0.01s [0.03 : 0.25]
Maximum number of openings Maximum Openings 9999 1 [0 : 9999]
Maximum Openings in one hour Max.Openings 1 hour 40 1 [1 : 60]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The interrupted current limit setpoint, fixes the Maximum breaker capacity (this value is set depending on the information
provided by the breaker manufacturer); the relay incorporates a KI2t counter for each phase, where every time a trip or
breaker opening occurs, the counter increases its value (in primary values). If the flowing current is lower than the rated
current, the relay will take the rated current value for its calculations. When the cumulate counter for each phase reaches or
exceeds the set value, the corresponding alarm signal will be activated.
The purpose of this function is to provide closer information of the current status of the breaker internal contacts, in order to
ensure appropriate breaker maintenance, and to decrease the possible risk of damage when the breaker has suffered
severe operations during a long time. Once the breaker has been operated, and the preventive maintenance is in place,
accumulated I2t values and the number of operations are reset to zero.
In this group of setpoints, the start values of the breaker Counters can be reset.
These Counters allow the breaker Maintenance. They are used to accumulate the breaker aging produced by a trip or a
breaker opening. In order to incorporate the breaker historic, in case of second hand breakers, the system allows assigning
an initial value to cumulated amperes, and to the number of opening and closing operations.
To supervise the breaker aging, Σ(KI)2t accumulated values are calculated and stored for each phase in each opening. If
the rated current is not exceeded, as in the case of a manual opening command, without fault current, the relay uses the
rated current value instead of the metered value.
5 (KI)2t value is accumulated and maintained in independent Counters for each phase. Counters can be accessed through
the local HMI as well as through the EnerVista 650 Setup software. The unit incorporates a setpoint to select the integration
time (KI2t Integ. Time) that allows either to assign a fix Opening time, or to leave the relay measure that time, from the
opening command to the breaker opening.
The signals associated to the opened or closed status of the breaker can be monitored at “Actual > Status > Breaker”
Table 5–23: BREAKER STATUS
BREAKER STATUS DESCRIPTION
BREAKER OPEN Open breaker status. In the switchgear selected as breaker, besides providing the usual switchgear contact
status, the system provides also the open breaker, closed breaker, and undefined breaker states, as well as
an indication of the set closing and opening failure time for such switchgear.
BREAKER CLOSED Breaker closed
BREAKER UNDEFINED Breaker undefined
The signals associated to breaker maintenance can be Table 5–24: BREAKER MAINTENANCE STATUS
monitored at “Actual > Metering > Records Status >
Breaker Maintenance”, and they are as follows:
BREAKER MAINTENANCE DESCRIPTION
KI2t PHASE A ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase A is exceeded.
KI2t PHASE B ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase B is exceeded.
KI2t PHASE C ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase C is exceeded.
BKR OPENINGS ALARM Relay total Number of Openings alarm
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM Relay total Number of Openings in one hour alarm
RESET KI2t COUNTERS KI2t Counters reset signal. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements, and it is used for resetpoint the KI2t counter through the corresponding signal, command,
digital input, etc.
RESET BKR COUNTERS Reset signal for the Opening and Closing Counters. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements, and it is used for resetpoint the breaker Opening and closing
counters.
BREAKER OPENINGS Number of Breaker openings
BREAKER CLOSINGS Number of Breaker closings
KI2t PHASE A Accumulated KI2t value for phase A ( KI2t Counter for Phase A)
KI2t PHASE B Accumulated KI2t value for phase B ( KI2t Counter for Phase B)
KI2t PHASE C Accumulated KI2t value for phase C ( KI2t Counter for Phase C)
BKR OPENING TIME Maximum breaker Opening time. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration
>Switchgear in the number of switchgear corresponding to the breaker selection
BKR CLOSING TIME Maximum breaker Closing time. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration
>Switchgear in the number of switchgear corresponding to the breaker selection
5
5.3.4 SWITCHGEAR
In firmware release 1.70 and higher ones there is the The configuration of snapshot events for each switchgear
possibility to enable or disable the generation of internal (enable or disable) can be selected at setpoints> System
signals for the different units (protection, control, inputs and Setup > Switchgear.
outputs, switchgear) available in the device.
Table 5–25: SWITCHGEAR SETPOINTS
DIRECTIONAL UNITS
3 x PHASE DIR (67P)
3 x NEUTRAL DIR (67N)
3 x GROUND DIR (67G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND DIR (67SG)
VOLTAGE UNITS
Phase under/overvoltage
3 x PHASE UV (27P)
3 x PHASE OV (59P)
Zero sequence overvoltage
3 x NEUTRAL OV HIGH (59NH)
3 x NEUTRAL OV LOW (59NL)
Additional under/overvoltage (can be connected to the open delta for measured zero sequence, or to the busbar)
3 x AUXILIARY OV (59X)
3 x AUXILIARY UV (27X)
Negative sequence overvoltage:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV (47P)
POWER
3 x FORWARD POWER (32FP)
3 x DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)
Besides, F650 units incorporate also the following control units:
1 x setpoint GROUP
3 x OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
3 x UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
1 x SYNCHROCHECK(25)
1 x AUTORECLOSE (79)
1 x BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)
1 x FUSE FAILURE (VTFF)
3 x BROKEN CONDUCTOR
1 x BREAKER setpointS 5
F650 units incorporate a flexible grouping capability for protection units. This means that protection units can be used in
either one of the following modes:
5 1x59NL
1x59X
1x59NL
1x59X
1x59NL
1x59X
1x27X 1x27X 1x27X
1x32FP 1x32FP 1x32FP
1x32 1x32 1x32
1x81U 1x81U 1x81U
1x81O 1x81O 1x81O
1 x Broken conductor 1 x Broken conductor 1 x Broken conductor
The setpoints used for setpoint table management are located in Setpoint >Control Elements > setpoint Group:
Table 5–27: SETPOINT GROUP SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SETPOINT GROUP
setpoint Description Name Default Value Step Range
setpoint Grouping Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A [GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 – GROUP 3]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The Relay incorporates several signals associated to the Protection elements grouping in tables. First, signals that indicate
the group activation:
GROUP 1 ACT ON This signal produces the activation of setpoint group 1
GROUP 2 ACT ON This signal produces the activation of setpoint group 2
GROUP 3 ACT ON This signal produces the activation of setpoint group 3
These activation signals for the different setpoint groups are configured using EnerVista 650 Setup at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements as shown in the figure.
The example above uses three digital inputs to perform the table selection, but it is possible to use any other logic signal in
the relay. 5
In case of using digital inputs, this allows the user to select the setpoint table using these digital inputs (which could come
from the PLC, or from a different relay, or from an auxiliary switch, for adaptive protection). This selection of the active
group has priority over the setpoint. If several signals are active at the same time, the highest one will be taken as valid. For
example, if selection signals for both groups 1 and 2 are active, the active table will be number 2.
The time used in the table change is one PLC logic scan cycle (5 ms typical), allowing a fast adaptation to system changes.
Another type of signals that refer to setpoint Groups are block signals. These are internal relay signals that indicate which
groups are active, and which are blocked. For example, if the setpoint grouping function is enabled and setpoint group 1
has been set as active, block signals from setpoint groups 2 and 3 will be active, and the block signal that corresponds to
group 1 will be inactive because that group is enabled.
Block signals are as follows:
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
All signals corresponding to setpoint Groups, both the activation and the block signals, are located in the Actual > Status >
Control Elements > setpoint Groups menu.
Where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplier setpoint
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
A, B, p = constants defined by the standard
TRESET = reset time in seconds
tr = characteristic constant.
Table 5–29: TABLE 5-29: TRIPPING TIME IN SECONDS FOR IEEE CURVES
DIAL CURRENT (I/ITAP)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE Extremely Inverse
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE Very Inverse
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378 5
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134
8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE Inverse
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068
Where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplying factor
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
K, E = constants defined by the standard
TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated)
5 tr = characteristic constant.
Where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplier setpoint
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
A, B, C, D, E = predefined constants
TRESET = reset time in seconds
5 tr = characteristic constant.
B D E
T = Dial A + ----------------------------------- + ----------------------------------2- + ----------------------------------3-
⎛ ------------------- – C⎞ ⎛ ---------------- – C⎞
I I ⎛ ---------------- – C⎞
I
⎝ I pickkup ⎠ ⎝ I pickup ⎠ ⎝ I pickup ⎠
Tr
T RESET = TDM × ---------------------------------
-
I ⎞2
⎛ --------------- - –1
⎝ I pickup⎠
where:
T = Operation time (in seconds).
Dial = Multiplying factor
5 I = Input current
Ipickup = Current pickup setpoint
A, B, C, D, E = Constants
Treset = Reset time (in seconds) assuming a 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated
Tr = Characteristic constant
where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplier setpoint
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
TRESET = reset time in seconds
⎛ ⎞ ⎛
⎜
⎞
⎟
⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
⎜ 45900 ⎟ ⎜
45900 ⎟
T=TDM× ⎜ ⎟ ×⎜⎜
Treset= TDM ⎟
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞5,6 ⎟ ⎜ 2 ⎟⎟
⎜⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎜ ⎟ −1⎟⎟ ⎜⎜ ⎟ −1⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝Ipickup⎠ ⎠ ⎜ ⎝Ipickup
⎝ ⎠ ⎟
⎠
where:
T = Operation time (in seconds).
TDM = Multiplying factor
I = Input current
Ipickup = Pickup current
Treset = Reset time (in seconds) assuming a 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated
The two first columns (40 points) correspond to the RESET curve. The other 4 columns, with 80 points in total, correspond
to the OPERATE curve. Reset characteristic values are between 0 and 0.98, and operation values are between 1.03 and
20.
The final curve will be created by means of a linear interpolation from the points defined by the user. This is a separate
process for the RESET and the OPERATE curve.
The definition of these points is performed in a separate module from the relay, using a configuration program included in
the EnerVista 650 Setup, which incorporates a graphical environment for viewing the curve, thus making it easy for the user
to create it. This module can be accessed from the “Edit Curve” option in the FlexCurve menu, at Setpoint > System
Setup > Flex Curves.
The F650 Phase current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
Phase time overcurrent (51PH/51PL)
Phase instantaneous overcurrent (50PH/50PL)
Phase directional overcurrent (67P)
Thermal Model (49)
If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the value set in the Pickup Level setpoint.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the phase time overcurrent units.
The following diagram shows the logic scheme followed by high range and low range time overcurrent elements (51PH and
51PL) in the following figure.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the phase instantaneous overcurrent
units.
5
The following figure shows the logic scheme diagram followed by high range and low range Instantaneous overcurrent
elements (50PH, 50PL).
Function: This setpoint allows enabling or disabling the corresponding directional unit.
MTA: The MTA setpoint corresponds to the Torque angle, which is the rotation applied to 5
phase-to-phase crossed voltage.
Direction: This setpoint allows selecting the area for the directional unit to operate, either forward
or reverse.
Block Logic: This setpoint allows selecting either permission or block, depending on the logic to be
applied in the event of directional element block.
Polarization Voltage Threshold: this is the minimum voltage considered for the direction calculation. Under this
setpoint, the unit will be blocked.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the
phase directional units.
Phase directional element is an independent Protection unit that provides block and Operation signals for each phase.
These signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection
> Phase Current”
Table 5–41: BLOCK AND OPERATION SIGNALS FOR THE PHASE DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT
BLOCK AND OPERATION FOR 67P
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR1 A OP
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR1 B OP
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR1 C OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR2 A OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR2 B OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR2 C OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR3 A OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR3 B OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR3 C OP
5 Internal signals provided by the relay in the directional unit are of two types, block signals and operation signals. In the
phase directional element, we can see how the obtained signals are separated for each phase (A, B, C), and by unit (1, 2,
3), and separated in block and operation signals.
Block signals indicate whether the directional unit is blocked, either by an external block signal or by polarization voltage
loss. Operation signals indicate whether the directional unit provides operation permission or not.
Upon block of the directional unit, the user can select its behavior in a block situation, this means, whether operation of its
supervised units is permitted, or on the other hand, if their operation is to be blocked under polarization voltage loss or
external block of the directional unit. This selection is made through the “Block Logic” setpoint. If the Block option is
selected, the supervised units operation will be disabled, and if the Permission option is selected, the supervised units will
remain enabled.
In the example shown on OVERCURRENT UNITS BLOCK CONFIGURATION BY THE DIRECTIONAL UNIT , the Block
Logic setpoint in the directional unit is set as Block, so in case of a directional unit block, operation signals will not produce
an output. As shown on the figure, block signals are activated, as the directional unit is blocked and the permission signals
are disabled to avoid operation of the associated protection units. If the Block Logic setpoint had set as Permission,
operation signals would be activated to allow the operation of the associated overcurrent elements.
Signals used to block overcurrent units are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
The figure shows the block configuration for the Group 1 high range time overcurrent element. Block is configured
independently for each phase and setpoint group, and the selected block signals can vary according to the user’s 5
requirements. The phase overcurrent unit will be blocked when the corresponding directional unit doesn’t allow operation.
PH IOC1 HIGH A BLK = NOT(PHASE DIR1 A OP). In this example, the overcurrent unit is also blocked by a digital input.
Directional units can also be blocked with signals coming from other relays, PLCs, or through signals configured in the relay
PLC Editor (Logic configuration tool). The signal used in that case is PHASE DIR BLK INP. Figure 5–8: shows an example
of the default block configuration of directional units by digital input. There is one block signal per input for each setpoint
group.
The following figure shows the logic scheme for the phase directional unit.
I'2
t =τ*Ln'2
I −1
Where,
τ is the heating/cooling time constant.
5 Function permission
Heating constant
Function
Heat Time Constant
DISABLED
6.0
N/A
0.1 min
[DISABLED – ENABLED]
[3.0 : 600.0]
Cooling constant Cool Time Constant 2.00 0.01 times Heat Time Ct.) [1.00 : 6.00]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Alarm level Alarm Level 80.0 0.1 % [1.0 : 110.0]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The F650 Neutral Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
• Neutral time overcurrent (51N)
• Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)
• Neutral directional unit (67N)
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
The following figure shows the logic scheme for the neutral Instantaneous overcurrent unit.
Neutral directional element is an independent Protection unit that provides block and Operation signals. These signals can
be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection > Neutral
Current”
67N Block (NEUTRAL DIR BLOCK): It indicates that the unit is blocked by digital input or because the Operation magnitude
(In current), or the Polarization magnitude (Vn voltage and/or Ip current) level is too low.
67N Operation (NEUTRAL DIR OP): It indicates that the directional unit is giving permission, that the angle
relations between the operation magnitude and the polarization magnitude are met, according to the set
conditions, or in case of having selected Permission in the Block Logic setpoint, it indicates that the unit allows
operation under block conditions.
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP
NEUTRAL DIR2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP
NEUTRAL DIR3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP
Figure 2–12: shows the operation of the zero sequence polarization, 3V0, in case of an AG fault. In this case, the
polarization magnitude 3V0 can be calculated from the three phase voltage values, or measured through the fourth voltage
input (Vx). In this last case, voltage transformer must be wye connected, and the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint in General
setpoints must be configured as VX. The operation magnitude 3I0, is calculated from the phase currents.
When Ip Polarization is selected, the Polarization magnitude is Ip, the current value measured at the fifth current input
(terminals B11-B12). This polarization current must usually come from a CT metering the current that flows from the ground
to the neutral of the neutral fault current source, which will mainly be a transformer. The direction is considered to be
Forward when the neutral current 3I0 is inside a ±90º arc at both sides of the polarization current. In any other case, the
direction will be Reverse. If the polarization current is lower than 5 mA, the unit output takes the value of the Block Logic
setpoint.VOLTAGE POLARIZATION
Figure 5–12: shows the Operation of the directional unit for a Phase A to Ground fault, where the Phase A current grows in
magnitude and is delayed with respect to its voltage by an angle similar to the protected line, while Va voltage decreases or
can even disappear if the fault is close and the fault resistance is very low.
-3V0
Fault Ia ≈ In
Cone 5º Maximum
-45º torque angle
IA
Forward
Vc Vb
3V0 = Va +Vb+Vc
Table 5–47: OUTPUT SIGNALS MANAGEMENT ACCORDING TO THE POLARIZATION TYPE SETPOINT
POLARIZATION SETPOINT NEUTRAL DIR BLOCK SIGNAL NEUTRAL DIR OP SIGNAL
Vo Vo < POL V THRESHOLD setpoint Permission Vo
Ip Ip < 5 mA Permission Ip
Vo + Ip Vo < POL V THRESHOLD Permission Vo
Ip < 5 Ma Permission Ip
5 Configuration of the required signals for blocking the neutral overcurrent units from the signals provided by the neutral
directional units is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements using the inverted operation
signals to block the trip, as shown in the following example:
How to block neutral time overcurrent units with neutral directional functions:
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR1 OP)
NEUTRAL TOC2 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR2 OP)
NEUTRAL TOC3 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR3 OP)
To block neutral instantaneous units:
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR1 OP)
NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR2 OP)
NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR3 OP)
The F650 Ground Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
Ground time overcurrent (51G)
Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G)
Ground directional unit (67G)
5 Curve shape
Time Dial
Curve
TD Multiplier
IEEE Ext Inv
1.00
N/A
0.01 s
[See list of curves]
[0.00 : 900.00]
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A [INSTANTANEOUS – LINEAR]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
67G unit is a directional protection element, used for monitoring the ground overcurrent units. The operation magnitude is
the ground current measured directly from the corresponding input (B9-B10), while the polarization magnitude is the neutral
voltage (3Vo) calculated from the three phase voltages or measured from the dedicated voltage input (A11-A12).
In case of using the voltage measured from the dedicated voltage input terminals, the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint in
General setpoints must be VN.
If the F650 is set to have synchronism check protection, then this input will be adjusted as busbar voltage and it will not be
the 3V0 voltage (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setpoint as VX)
If the F650 does not have a synchronism check unit, then this input can be set as 3V0 neutral voltage, and it can be used
as polarization magnitude for the 67G unit (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setpoint as VN).
As in the case of a phase directional unit, this element incorporates a voltage loss logic that allows blocking or permitting
the trip by means of a setpoint
Operation of the Ground directional unit 67G is similar to the operation of the neutral directional unit 66N (please refer to
section NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL UNIT (67N)), with the exception that the operation magnitude here is the ground current
Ig (67G), measured from the input terminals B9-B10 instead of the Neutral current, In (67N), calculated from the phase
currents.
Polarization magnitudes can be, as in the case of 67N, Polarization voltage (3V0), either calculated from the phase
voltages or measured from terminals A11-A12, or polarization current (Ip), measured from the firth input transformer
terminals, Isg, terminals B11-B12.
The following table shows the used magnitudes in each of the Polarization possibilities:
The following table shows the management of the unit output signals (block and permission) depending on the
Polarization Type setpoint.
Table 5–53: OUTPUT SIGNALS MANAGEMENT ACCORDING TO THE POLARIZTION TYPE SETPOINT
POLARIZATION SETPOINT GROUND DIR BLOCK SIGNAL GROUND DIR OP SIGNAL
Vo V0 < Ajs. POL V THRESHOLD Permission V0
Ip IP < 5 mA Permission IP
Vo + Ip V0 < POL V THRESHOLD Permission V0
IP < 5 mA Permission IP
The configuration of the signals required for blocking the Ground overcurrent elements from the signals provided by the
Ground directional unit is made at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements using inverted operation
signals to block the trip.
For example, to block the ground time delayed units:
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR1 OP)
GROUND TOC2 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR2 OP)
GROUND TOC3 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR3 OP)
5 To block the Ground Instantaneous units:
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR1 OP)
GROUND IOC2 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR2 OP)
GROUND IOC3 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR3 OP)
The F650 Sensitive ground Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
• Sensitive ground time overcurrent (51SG)
• Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent (50SG)
• Isolated ground overcurrent (50IG)
• Sensitive ground directional overcurrent (67SG)
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
Vn=3V0
Operation Area
Vh
Vl
Il Ih In=3I0
Figure 5–13: OPERATION CHARACTERISTIC FOR UNIT 50IG
OPERATION PRINCIPLES:
Operation of the isolated Ground unit is based on the detection of a current that exceeds the setpoint, with neutral voltage
supervision (3V0). This allows to set the unit in a very sensitive way, with a very low current level, ensuring that small angle
or ratio errors in the current transformers will not produce the relay operation, as the neutral voltage verified is higher than
the one set.
Values for h, IL, Vh and VL, which define the relay operation area, are configurable. H magnitudes must be higher than L
magnitudes. The 50IG unit can be supervised by directional unit 67SG.
Using the relay input magnitudes In and Vn, if the point defined by (In, Vn) is inside the operation area and if the directional
unit (if directional supervision is set) allows it, the unit picks up and the set delay time starts counting down. If a directional
block appears during the countdown, the unit is reset. After the set time the unit trips. Once tripped, the relay cannot be
blocked by the directional unit, and the trip remains while the fault exists.
After the trip, the deviation time to instantaneous starts to run, so that all pickups produced during this time will produce an
Instantaneous trip. This means that, if after a trip the breaker is reclosed and the fault persists or reappears, the relay trip
will be instantaneous. If the user doesn’t want to use this function, then the Deviation Time to Instantaneous (Time to
inst) setpoint must be set to zero seconds. Once the time has expired, the unit returns to its normal operation.
Operation Direction (Direction): This setpoint indicates the Direction for which the unit will allow a trip. Depending on
this setpoint, the unit will be activated for faults in a direction or in the opposite direction.
Possible setpoint values are FORWARD or REVERSE.
Polarization Voltage Threshold (Pol. V Threshold):This is the minimum polarization voltage threshold, for a voltage
value lower than this setpoint the directional unit will be blocked.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this
unit.
Sensitive ground directional element is an independent Protection unit that provides block and Operation signals. These
signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection >
Sensitive Ground Current”
67SG Block (SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK): It indicates that the unit is blocked by digital input or because the Operation
magnitude (In current), or the Polarization magnitude (Vn voltage and/or Ip current) level is too low.
67SG Operation (SENS GND DIR1 OP): It indicates that the directional unit is giving permission, that the angle relations
between the operation magnitude and the polarization magnitude are met, according to the set conditions, or in case of
having selected Permission in the Block Logic setpoint, it indicates that the unit allows operation under block conditions.
Configuration of the required signals for blocking the sensitive ground overcurrent units from the signals provided by the
sensitive ground directional units is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements using the
inverted operation signals to block the trip, as shown in the following example:
For example, to block sensitive Ground time overcurrent units, use the following signals:
SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)
SENS GND TOC2 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR2 OP)
SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR3 OP)
To block Ground instantaneous units:
SENS GND IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)
SENS GND IOC2 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR2 OP)
SENS GND IOC3 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR3 OP)
To block isolated Ground units:
ISOLATED GND1 BLK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)
ISOLATED GND2 BLK = NOT (SENS GND DIR2 OP)
ISOLATED GND3 BLK = NOT (SENS GND DIR3 OP)
The F650 Negative sequence menu incorporates the Negative sequence time overcurrent (46P) unit:
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
5
D
T=
5 1−
V
Vpickup
Where:
T = operation time
D = operation time setpoint (delay)
V = voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = pickup setpoint (Pickup level)
5 Function Permission (Function): This setpoint indicates whether the phase overvoltage element is enabled or disabled.
Pickup Level: This is the voltage threshold over which the overvoltage unit will operate.
Trip time (Trip Delay): setpoint of the Protection element operation time.
Reset time (Reset Delay): Reset time of the Protection element.
Operation logic (Logic): This setpoint allows the unit operation logic selection:
ANY PHASE The unit will operate under an overvoltage condition in any of the
three phases.
TWO PHASES The unit will operate under an overvoltage condition in at least two
phases.
ALL PHASES The unit will operate under an overvoltage condition in the three
phases.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for
this unit.
5.4.8.3 NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE UNIT (HIGH LEVEL AND LOW LEVEL) (59NH/59NL)
59NH unit is a neutral overvoltage protection element that uses as input magnitude the system neutral voltage (3V0)
calculated from the phase voltages, or the voltage value measured by the 4th voltage transformer. It is used for detecting
unbalanced system voltage conditions, caused by a ground fault condition, or by the loss of one or two of the voltages. The
unit time delay is selectable between 0 and 900 seconds. The unit incorporates a reset with a selectable delay between 0
and 900 seconds.
A setpoint makes the selection of the input voltage for this unit, either calculated from the phase voltages or measured from
the 4th transformer of the F650. The setpoint to select the source of this voltage is configured in Setpoint > System Setup
> General Setpoint >Auxiliary Voltage (Vn or Vx). By selecting Vn, the neutral voltage used in the phase overvoltage
element will be measured at the fourth relay voltage transformer (A11-A12), and in this case the synchronism element of
the relay will not be available. If Vx is selected as auxiliary voltage, this setpoint corresponds to the busbar voltage input
used for the synchronism element, and the neutral voltage used in protection elements 59NH and 59NL will be calculated
from the phase voltages.
Notice that the neutral overvoltage element will not be available if a DELTA Connection is set in the Phase VT Connection
setpoint in General setpoints, and the fourth voltage transformer input is set to the busbar voltage for the synchronism
element (Vx in Auxiliary Voltage setpoint). This is due to the fact that with this combination of setpoints is not possible to
calculate the zero sequence component from the phase-to-phase voltage magnitudes.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
If the voltage input is calculated from the phase voltages, the equation for obtaining the input value will be as
follows:
3V 0 = V A + V B + V C
If the voltage input is set as the voltage measured by the 4th voltage transformer, then the metered value will be applied
directly to the algorithm. This voltage can be taken through a grounding resistance, a high impedance grounding, a busbar
voltage etc.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
5.4.9 POWER
RESTRAINING OPERATION
P- P+
0
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
The F650 includes three 32FP elements. Each elements incorporates two stages, the first stage, less critical, is intended to
produce an alarm, the second stage is used for trip. Both levels are set in primary values, for instance: if in general
setpoints we set CT_RATIO to a value of 100, and the same value for PT_RATIO, the base power will be: 100 x 100 =
10.000 W
The block time allows blocking the element operation during a set time after the coupling breaker closure. For this purpose
it is necessary to connect the breaker bay using a 52B type contact. The purpose of this setpoint is to avoid spurious trips
caused by overloads after the breaker closure.
Power calculations depending on the VT connection:
1- WYE VT connection, or only one transformer in phase-to-ground connection:
V ab V bc V ca
P = --------- × I a × cos ( Y a – 30 ) + --------- × I b × cos ( Y b – 30 ) + --------- × I c × cos ( Y c – 30 )
3 3 3
a) UNIT DESCRIPTION
The Directional Power element responds to three-phase active power measured from the feeder associated to the F650.
This element can be selected to operate according to the power threshold adjusted in the corresponding setpoint. This
element is ideal for reverse power applications (F32 REV) or forward power (F32 FWD), depending on the selected
setpoint. The relay measures the three-phase power for wye or delta connections.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional Power
Characteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition:
P cos(ϕ) + Q sin (ϕ) > SMIN
where: P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the F650 convention, ϕ is the angle set at the 32 setpoint
(DIR POWER ANGLE) in degrees in steps of 0.01º, and SMIN is the minimum operating power
The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay setpoints) units. Both units can be used for alarm and trip,
and they can be set separately to provide a mixed power protection.
The Directional Power Characteristic is shown in the following diagram.
Figure (a) below shows setpoints for reverse power application, while Figure (b) shows setpoints for low forward power
application.
The following table shows the SMIN and angle values that must be used for some typical applications:
By adding 90º to the angles shown on the table, the represented units would be similar but with Reactive Power instead of
Active Power.
Any other angle would provide a mixed Protection Between Active and Reactive power.
A different angle selection for Stage 1 and Stage 2 could provide in a single unit, a Reactive and Active power limitation. For
example, using the following values:
Dir Power Angle 1(RCA) 0º
Stage 1 Tap 0
Dir Power Angle 2(RCA) 90º
Stage 2 Tap 0
We would obtain a mixed Protection Between figure (d) and figure (e).
b) SETPOINTS
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
Function: Enables or disables the directional element.
Blk Time After Close: In seconds. This setpoints allow to block the 32 element during the time specified in
the setpoint after the breaker switches from OPEN to CLOSED.
Dir Power Angle (1-2) (RCA): This setpoint specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional power
unit. This setpoint provides ability to respond to the function in any direction defined
(active forward power, active low forward power, etc.)
Stage (1 - 2) Tap: This setpoint specifies the minimum Operation three-phase power for the Stage 1 (2) element. The
power value defined in this setpoint is the minimum distance between the source and the directional power characteristic.
This value can be positive or negative. A positive value would define a characteristic slip through the positive power axis,
while a negative value would move the characteristic through the negative axis. The value of this setpoint is defined in total
MW (primary) – the CT and VT value is considered in the calculations.
NOTE:
Even if the unit defined in this setpoint is MW, this does not necessarily mean that the resulting value and the RCA
setpoint are in MW. For example:
RCA : 30 º SMIN: 100 MW.
If we assume that there is only active power. The unit operation would be produced for a value of:
P = 100 / cos (30) = 115,7 MW.
If there was only reactive power:
Q = 100/sin (30) = 200,0 MVar.
(In this case the real Operation units are Mvar, even if SMIN is expressed in MW.)
Stage 1 (2)Time: This setpoint specifies the delay for Stage 1 of the element. For reverse power or direct power
applications, usually Stage 1 is used for alarm functions, while Stage 2 is used for tripping functions.
Events: This setpoint enables or disables the generation of events. All states in this function are affected by this setpoint.
c) STATUSES
Statuses defined for this Function are as follows:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLOCK : Writing status, operates by level. When this status is activated externally (via PLC), the
directional power element is blocked. This status affects both units in the protection
element (stage 1 and 2).
Activation of this status produces the event: DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLK ON.
Deactivation produces the event : DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLK OFF.
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP: Reading status. This is activated when the unit that corresponds to stage 1/2 is
activated. Events generated by this unit are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP: Reading status. Activation of this status indicates that the power value has exceeded the
threshold indicated by the Stage 1/2 unit. Events generated by this unit are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP: Reading status. This status is a logic OR between the DIR PWR STG1 PKP and DIR
PWR STG2 PKP statuses. Activation of this status indicates that the power value has
exceeded the threshold indicated by any of the Stage 1/2 units. Events generated by
this unit are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP ON
5 DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP: Reading status. This status is a logic OR between the DIR PWR STG1 OP and DIR
PWR STG2 OP statuses. Activation of this status indicates that the power value has
exceeded the threshold indicated by any of the Stage 1/2 units. Events generated by
this unit are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP OFF
5.5CONTROL ELEMENTS
The F650 incorporates the following control elements:
setpoint Group
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Synchrocheck (25)
Autoreclose (79)
Breaker Failure (50BF)
Broken Conductor (I2/I1)
Note: for all control elements related to the breaker, it must be considered that all operations will be performed considering
the status of the switchgear configured as breaker. In setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear up to 16 switchgear
elements can be configured to operate and be monitored, but only one of them can be configured as breaker, for
monitoring, number of openings and closings counters, (KI)2t.
The setpoints used for setpoint table management are located in Setpoint >Control Elements > setpoint Group:
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
For more detail information go to section 5.4.1
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
Frequency elements operate with the system frequency, this frequency is measured in the voltage channel set for the
5 frequency reference, in the Frequency Reference setpoint inside Setpoint > System Setup >General setpoints.
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
Note: The Switchgear element used in the F650 synchronism unit is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setpoint inside Breaker setpoints, at “Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker setpoints”.
WARNING
When testing this function do not forget that the relay must detect an open breaker to operate.
The synchronism element is used for monitoring the connection of two parts of the circuit by the close of a breaker. This unit
verifies that voltages (V1 and V2) at both sides of the breaker are within the magnitude, angle and frequency limits set by
the user. V1 and V2 are the line and busbar voltage values measured by the relay.
Synchronism check (25) is defined as the comparison of the voltage difference of two circuits with different sources to be
either linked through an impedance element (transmission line, feeder, etc.), or connected through parallel circuits of
defined impedance( Figure 5–19:) . The voltage comparison between both sides of a breaker is performed before closing
the breaker, in order to minimize internal damage that could occur due to the voltage difference, both in magnitude and
angle. This is extremely important in steam generating plants, where reclosing output lines with angle differences could
lead to severe damage to the turbine axis.
V
s
5
2s 2
5r
V
r
5
C
/2 Z
lin
e C
/2
2
5
Z
Pa
ralle
l
Figure 5–19:
The difference in voltage level and phase angle in a given moment is the result of the existing load between remote sources
connected through parallel circuits (load flux), as well as a consequence of the impedance of those elements connecting
them (even if there is no load flux in parallel circuits, or because sources to be connected are completely independent and
isolated from one another).
In interconnected systems, the angle difference between both ends of an open breaker is usually negligible, as its sources
are remotely connected through other elements (equivalent or parallel circuits). However, in isolated circuits as in the case
of an independent generator, the difference in angle, voltage levels and relative slip of voltage phasors can be very
important. It may happen that the relative slip of voltage values is very low or null so that they will rarely be in phase.
Luckily, due to the changing conditions of a power system (connection-disconnection of loads, sources, and new inductive-
capacitive elements) the relative slip between phasors is not null and they can be synchronized.
In the first case, even if we must take into consideration the length of the line whose ends (sources) will be connected for
determining the angle difference between them, this is not enough to fix the synchronism conditions before closing the
breaker. Experience tells us that the window of angle difference between voltage phasors must be fixed to a value of 15º-
20º.
setpoints/System Setup/General setpoints/Auxiliary Voltage setpoint must be set to Vx, in order to monitor auxiliary
voltage instead of Vn (neutral voltage, coming from an open delta connection).
5.5.4.2 APPLICATION
Even if the application range of F650 is quite wide and the unit can be used in distribution lines at any voltage level, it must
be taken into account that it is a three-pole tripping relay, designed for managing a single breaker. This is why F650 is
not suitable for one and a half breaker configurations, or ring configurations where a transmission line or feeder has two
breakers.
5.5.4.3 SETPOINTS
Setpoint > Control Elements > Synchrocheck
There is only one synchrocheck unit in the F650.
Table 5–72: 25 UNIT SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > SYNCHROCHECK
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT STEP RANGE
VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Dead bus voltage level Dead Bus Level 10.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Live bus voltage level Live Bus Level 50.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Dead line voltage level Dead Line Level 10.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Live line voltage level Live Line Level 50.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Voltage Difference Max Volt Difference 10.00 0.01 V [2.00 : 300.00]
Angle Difference Max Angle Difference 10.0 0.1 Deg [2.0 : 80.0]
Frequency Slip Max Freq Difference 20 10 mHz [10 : 5000]
Breaker Closing time Time 0.50 0.01 s [0.01 : 600.00]
Dead Line – Dead Bus Function permission DL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Live Line – Dead Bus Function permission LL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Dead Line – Live Bus Function permission DL-LB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
F650 relays verify synchronism by establishing and comparing three basic parameters: the difference in
module and angle of voltage phasors, and the frequency slip of a phasor related to the other one.
synchrocheck setpoints include a fourth time setpoint, that allows using an anticipative algorithm to issue a
closing signal.
Voltage Difference (Max Volt Difference): Maximum Difference in module between the line and busbar voltage
to allow a closing in the synchrocheck unit.
Angle Difference (Max Angle Difference): Maximum Difference in angle between the line and busbar voltage
to allow a closing in the synchrocheck unit.
Frequency Slip (Max Freq Difference): Maximum difference in frequency (slip) between both voltage values to
be compared in the synchrocheck unit.
Breaker Closing time (Time): Estimated breaker Closing time, used for establishing the Closing order in a
moment that allows the busbar and line voltages to be in phase.
This time is considered if the relative slip is higher than 5 mHz; in this case, an anticipative algorithm is
executed to calculate the closing signal with the necessary advance for the breaker effective Closing to be
produced when voltages are in phase. In case the frequency slip is high (higher than 5 Hz) and it is not
possible to obtain a closing in phase, the used algorithm ensures that the voltage difference in the moment
of the closing is lower than the set angle (Max Angle Difference).
Internal signals provided by the F650 (Actual> Status > Control Elements > Synchrocheck) for the synchronism unit are as
follows:
Table 5–73: SYNCHROCHECK INTERNAL STATES
SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP
SYNCROCHECK OP
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
SYNCROCHECK COND OP
DL-DB OPERATION
DL-LB OPERATION
LL-DB OPERATION
SLIP CONDITION
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP: Block signal for the synchrocheck unit, configurable at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements
SYNCROCHECK OP: Closing permission signal in live line-live bus conditions with open breaker.
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM: General Closing permission of the Synchronism unit. It contemplates all possible
situations, live line-live bus conditions, and the closing permission logics (dead line-
dead bus, live line- dead bus, dead line-live bus). Note: in case the Function is
disabled, the Closing permission signal will be activated in order not to interfere with
possible logics where it is included. If the synchronism unit is enabled, this signal will
only be activated in the closing conditions established by setpoint.
SYNCROCHECK COND OP: Closing permission according to permission logics (DL-DB, LL-DB, DL-LB).
DL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – dead bus condition.
Voltage and frequency values for line and busbar can be obtained, both in primary and secondary values at:
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage
VBB Primary (KV) Busbar voltage in primary values
VL Primary (KV) Line voltage in primary values
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Voltage
Line Voltage (V) Line voltage in secondary values
Bus Voltage (V) Busbar voltage in secondary values
Actual> Metering > Frequency
Line Frequency (Hz) Line frequency in Hz
Bus Frequency (Hz) Bus frequency in Hz
Note on the measure: voltage and current angles are available for the user from firmware version 1.60.
The voltage angles can be obtained in primary metering values (Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage), being the 5
line voltage angle, the one that corresponds to the voltage set in the frequency reference in General setpoints (please refer
to the voltage correspondence table (Table 5–71:), and the angle of the busbar voltage the one that corresponds to Vx
Angle, when the Auxiliary Voltage setpoint as been selected as VX.
5.5.4.5 ALGORITHM
F650 units perform the synchronism check by basically establishing and comparing three parameters:
Module difference of voltage phasors ΔV (V)
Phase angle of voltage phasors Δϕ (º)
Frequency slip between two phasors S (Hz)
These parameters are continuously determined and managed once that Unit 25 has been enabled by setpoint, and
in open breaker conditions. It is necessary to consider that all calculations are made once the open breaker condition is
detected; if the breaker is closed or undefined, the synchronism unit will not issue a closing permission signal, even when
closing conditions are met.
If voltage on one side of the breaker to be closed is null, the synchronism unit cannot establish the synchronism check, and
therefore it will not issue synchronism permission. For these cases, usual in breaker maintenance situations, or in new
installations where voltage might not be present, but the breaker operation needs to be verified, F650 units incorporate
closing permission logics for situations of:
Dead Line – Dead Bus (DL-DB)
Live Line – Dead Bus (LL-DB)
Dead Line – Live Bus (DL-LB)
In order to establish the closing permission signal, the first parameter used by the algorithm is the difference in magnitude
between line and bus voltages, and afterwards, the angle difference and frequency slip are verified.
Voltage Difference ΔV
Comparing the voltage values for line voltage (V1) and busbar voltage (V2) at both sides of the breaker, the relay can
determine the synchronism situation of the unit (see Table 2–73:).
Being:
V1 line voltage
V2 bus voltage
VL Minimum acceptable voltage by setpoint to establish synchronism conditions (dead line and bus levels).
VH Appropriate voltage to establish synchronism conditions, configured by setpoint (live line and bus levels).
(2) (V1 & V2) > VH Permitted Live Line – Live Bus V1 > live line level V2 > live bus level
(3) (V1 & V2) < VL Not permitted Dead Line – Dead Bus V1 < dead line level V2 < dead bus level
(4) (V1 < VL) & (VL< V2 < VH) Not permitted Not permitted V1 < dead line level V2 > dead bus level
V2 < live bus level
(5) (V2 < VL) & (VL < V1 < VH) Not permitted Not permitted V1 > dead line level V2 < dead bus level
V1 < live line level
(6) (V1 < VL) & (V2 > VH) Not permitted Dead Line – Live Bus V1 < dead line level V2 > live bus level
(7) (V2 < VL) & (V1 > VH) Not permitted Live Line – Dead Bus V1 > live line level V2 < dead bus level
5
Table 5–74: shows the different synchrocheck and closing logic situations, that can be produced depending on
the line and busbar voltage levels.
Live Line – Live Bus (Synchronism check): Only in case number (2), with live line and live bus, the unit will start
evaluating the line and busbar voltage comparison with respect to the setpoint ΔVset
established by setpoint (Max Volt Difference). In this case, if the voltage difference is
lower than ΔVset, the synchronism check unit (25) will verify the angle difference Δϕ
adjusted by setpoint (Max Angle Difference).
Dead Line – Dead Bus (DL - DB): Case number (3) will not allow the synchronism function, but it will allow DL-DB
operation logic, if this logic is enabled by setpoint (DL-DB Function).
Dead Line – Live Bus (DL - LB): Case number (6) will not allow the synchronism function, but it will allow DL-LB Operation
logic, if this logic is enabled by setpoint (DL-LB Function)
Live Line – Dead Bus (LL - DB): Case number (7) will not allow the synchronism function, but it will allow LL-DB operation
logic, if this logic is enabled by setpoint (LL-DB Function)
Case numbers (1), (4) and (5) are not considered neither for synchronism check purposes, nor for closing logic.
Δ ϕ se t
Δ ϕ a c tu a
V H
V L
V 1 V 2
The Closing process using anticipative algorithm is described on the following figure:
ϕ2
ϕ1
ϕ
V R e f V ’s V
Where:
Vref Referenced phasor (the one with lower frequency)
V’s Calculated voltage phasor, depending on the set breaker closing time (anticipative algorithm)
ϕ1 Angle difference set as maximum angle difference (Δϕset , Max Angle Difference)
ϕ2 = Angle difference between Vref and Vs. The algorithm starts operating when ϕ2 equals two times
the angle set as maximum angle difference.
Closing permission is given when V’s is over Vref, which means that line and busbar voltages are in phase.
If the frequency slip is high, it is possible that as soon as the window defined by two times the maximum angle difference
(ϕ2) is entered, the relay will produce a closing permission output, if it is guaranteed that the projected phasor will be within
the limit marked by the setpoint, as shown in the following figure.
ϕ2
ϕ1 ϕ1
V Ref
V ’s
ϕ
V
5.5.5.1 INTRODUCTION
Note: The Switchgear element used in the F650 autoreclose unit is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setpoint inside Breaker setpoints, at “Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker setpoints”. Configuration of these
Switchgear parameters is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear using EnerVista 650 Setup
software.
The F650 autoreclose unit allows producing up to four breaker “shots” prior to locking out. Thanks to the great flexibility of
F650 configurable logic, the conditions to produce the autoreclose initiation and the selection of which protection elements
will be enabled after each shot can be programmed. This flexibility allows implementing protection schemes that used to
require wiring and special functions in conventional equipments. One application is, for instance, to program instantaneous
the first protection trip and the second one to be time delayed, in order to give time for output fuses to burning of a feeder
branch. This can be as simply as disable the instantaneous units after the first shot using the programmable logic. (see
example in section )
AR LEVEL BLOCK: This signal is configured to block the autoreclose by level; when the block signal disappears, the
recloser goes to Lockout status before returning to either the READY status, or the
corresponding status in the reclosing cycle.
AR PULSE BLOCK: This signal is configured to block the autoreclose by pulse; a pulse moves the autoreclose to
5 BLOCK status. The autoreclose block is active until an unblock signal is received.
AR PULSE UNBLOCK: This signal is configured as autoreclose unblock by pulse; this pulse is required to bring the
recloser out of the block status. The autoreclose goes to Lockout after a block situation.
AR INITIATE: This signal indicates the autoreclose initiation. Usually, the factory default configuration sets this
signal as a combination of the general trip signal (Virtual Output 83), and an external input
configured as AR Initiate.
AR CONDS INPUT: This signal configures the conditions that are to be met before executing a breaker close
command. These conditions are verified once the configured Dead Time has expired, and they
are only considered if the Cond. Permission setpoint is enabled. Otherwise, these conditions
wouldn’t have any effect. In the default factory configuration, the conditions input is associated to
the synchronism check element close permission.
AR BLOCK BY PULSE Autoreclose blocked by pulse. See AR block signals configuration (AR PULSE BLOCK)
AR STATUS Autoreclose status (see )
AR LOCKOUT MODE Autoreclose lockout mode (see )
AR BLOCK MODE Autoreclose block mode (see )
The following diagram describes the different autoreclose states, as well as the transitions between states.
Once the breaker is open, it waits for the time set in Dead Time N setpoint, being N the number of the cycle in
progress. If during this waiting the breaker is closed or reclose initiation conditions are given, the recloser will go to
LOCKOUT status by anomaly (AR LCK BY ANOMALY).
Once the Dead Time has expired, in case the Conditions Permission setpoint is disabled, a closing command would
be produced. If the conditions permission setpoint is enabled, the system will wait for the conditions fixed in the
conditions input (AR CONDS INPUT) configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements; if the
waiting period for the reclosing conditions signal activation exceeds the Hold Time, the autoreclose will go to Lockout
status by conditions (AR LCK BY CONDS).
The autoreclose gives a Closing command and waits for the breaker to close. If the Fail to Close Time setpoint is
exceeded, the autoreclose will go to lockout by failure of closing (AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE).
At this point, the diagram indicates that a reclosing cycle has been reached, and so the cycle counter is increased. In this
time, the period set in Reset Time starts to count. If during the set unit reset time there is no autoreclose initiation, the cycle
counter will reset to its initial value (1), and the autoreclose will return to the standby status (READY). If during the Reset
Time setpoint period, there is a new autoreclose initiation, the Reclose In Progress sequence will start again. If this
reclose is produced after the last configured cycle in the Maximum Number of Shots setpoint, the autorecloser will go to
Lockout by maximum number of shots (AR LCK BY SHOTS).
AR LOCKOUT
This is a safety status, scheme lockout blocks all phases of the reclosing cycle, preventing automatic reclosure.
From the out of service (AR DISABLE) and BLOCK statuses, the autoreclose will stay in LOCKOUT prior going to
READY.
From the RECLOSE IN PROGRESS status, the recloser will go to LOCKOUT status if any of the anomalies described
above occur.
5 To go from the LOCKOUT status to READY it is necessary that the breaker is closed and stays closed for preset time in
Reclaim Time setpoint.
AR BLOCK
The BLOCK status is similar to the LOCKOUT status, as it guarantees that if the autoreclose is in Block, no breaker
close command will be produced, but the difference between them is that this Block status is reached by an external
action. The autoreclose block can be configured by pulse or level signals. This configuration must be selected at
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
When the autoreclose block signal is deactivated, either by a level change in the set signal (in case of block by level) or
by an Unblock pulse (in case of block by pulse), the block status is abandoned and the autoreclose returns to the
Lockout status.
Configurable signals to block the autorecloser are described in section 5.5.5.3.
5.5.5.6 LOGIC FOR BLOCKING PROTECTION FUNCTIONS DURING THE RECLOSING CYCLE
The F650 autoreclose generates a series of internal signals that allow performing block logics for Protection units during
the reclosing cycle. These signals are blocks after autoreclose shots (BLK AFTER SHOT). For example, if the user wants
to block a protection unit during the complete reclosing cycle, it is necessary to configure a signal as an OR of the four
blocking signals provided after each reclosing cycle in the logic configuration tool Setpoint > Logic Configuration, and
then use it to block the desired protection units at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Figure 5–24:shows an example of the logic configuration for the block signal during the reclosing cycle.
Figure 5–25: shows an example of the autoreclose initiation and protection unit block signals after the different
shots. The autoreclose initiate signal is configured to the relay general trip that corresponds to virtual output 83
configured in the logic configuration tool, and a physical contact to generate an external autoreclose initiation.
5
In the example shown on the figure, the 50PH element block signal is configured as a combination of block by digital input,
block by non-trip permission of the directional unit, and finally the unit will remain blocked during the reclosing cycle. This
means that only the first trip can be executed by the phase instantaneous overcurrent unit; after the first reclose shot, the
unit will remain blocked until the end of the cycle.
Figure 5–25: CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE OF THE RECLOSE INITIATION AND BLOCK SIGNALS
Note: The Switchgear element used in the Breaker Failure unit is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setpoint, inside Breaker setpoints at Setpoint > Protection Elements > Breaker > Breaker setpoints
The breaker failure unit is used to determine when a trip command sent to a breaker has not been executed within a
selectable delay. Most commonly it is a failure to open from the tripped breaker. In the event of a breaker failure, the 50BF
unit must issue a signal that will trip the rest of breakers connected at that time to the same busbar, and that can provide
fault current.
Comparing the current measured by the Relay with a setpoint level makes breaker failure detection. If after receiving a
breaker initiate signal, the current level were maintained over the setpoint level during a longer period than the set time, this
would indicate that the breaker that has received the opening command has not been able to open and clear the fault, and
the relay would issue the corresponding breaker failure signal.
F650 units incorporate 2 levels of current and time, together with a trip without current unit, and an internal arc detection
unit.
The breaker failure Initiate signal is configured at setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements. In the BRK
FAILURE INITIATE input, the user must select the desired signal for the breaker failure initiation.
The following table describes the breaker failure unit setpoints: Setpoint > Control Elements > Breaker Failure
Table 5–78: 50BF UNIT SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > BREAKER FAILURE
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Supervision (retrip) pickup level Supervision Pickup 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
5 Hiset pickup level Hiset Pickup 5.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Lowset pickup level Lowset Pickup 2.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Internal arc pickup level Internal Arc Pickup 0.10 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Internal arc time delay Internal Arc Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Retrip time delay Supervision Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Hiset time delay HiSet Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Lowset time delay LowSet Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Second stage time delay 2nd Step Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
WITHOUT current unit time delay No Current Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Signals relative to breaker failure provided by the relay can be viewed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Breaker
Failure, and they are as follows:
Table 5–79: BREAKER FAILURE STATUS
BREAKER FAILURE STATUS
BKR FAIL INITIATE
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION
BKR FAIL HISET
BKR FAIL LOWSET
INTERNAL ARC
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP
BKR FAIL INITIATE External signal for breaker failure initiation. (Configurable at setpoints> Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements).
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT Signal for breaker failure without current
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION Signal for supervision level breaker failure (retrip)
BKR FAIL HISET Signal for high-level breaker failure
BKR FAIL LOWSET Signal for low-level breaker failure
INTERNAL ARC Signal for internal arc
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Signal for Second level breaker failure (high and low)
The following figure shows the logic scheme for the breaker failure unit:
Note: The Switchgear element used in the VT Fuse Failure unit is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setpoint, inside Breaker setpoints at Setpoint > Protection Elements > Breaker > Breaker setpoints. This switchgear
must have previously been configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear
Fuse failure detector is used to block protection units that can operate incorrectly due to a partial or total voltage loss. This
loss can be caused by the voltage transformers secondary circuit protection fuse failure.
Setpoint > Control Elements > VT Fuse Failure
The fuse failure unit has only two setpoints, one to enable or disable the unit and the other to enable or disable the
snapshot event generation.
The fuse failure signal provided by the unit (VT FUSE FAILURE) can be monitored at Actual> Status > Control Elements
>VT Fuse Failure
F650 units incorporate a broken or fallen conductor detection function. The relay uses the ratio between the negative
sequence current, I2, and the positive sequence current I1. In normal and balanced load situations, this ratio is zero, while
in severe load fault conditions, an unbalance is produced and this ratio is increased.
Setpoint > Control Elements > Broken Conductor
This way, when the function is enabled and the unbalance is produced over the set percentage, the unit will pick up. If
unbalance conditions are maintained during a period longer than the set time delay, the unit will trip.
In order to avoid trips or pickups with very weak loads there is a current level threshold to inhibit the operation of the
unit when the three phase currents are below that fixed level.
Note: The I2/I1 current inhibition level for the different firmware versions is as follows:
The Operation Threshold level has been included to allow the user selecting the current inhibition level suitable for a
particular application, in order to avoid operation of the unit when the relay is not connected to the line or in case the relay
has previously operated correctly and has been disconected from the line, as in this case the operation condition is met but
the relay should not trip.
The operation threshold operation is as follows:
The Broken conductor element will be fully operational if at least one of the phase current levels is higher than the setpoint.
This condition assumes that the relay is connected to the line.
If the unit is on trip or pickup condition, the element will be reset if the three phase currents are below the operation
threshold level. This condition assumes that the relay is not connected to the line and therefore the relay should not trip.
Due to the response time of this function, if the set time delay is 0s, a trip could occur in situations where, for example, one
of the currents is stopped before the rest, as these currents would produce a negative sequence current calculation.
Therefore, to avoid this kind of undesired trips, it is strongly recommended to establish a minimum time delay setpoint, such
as 100 ms, or higher depending on the expected normal unbalances in the network, to differentiate these situations from
broken conductor situations.
F650 units incorporate a locked rotor element with three units. Protection element 48 produces a trip when current
(primary values) exceeds the setpoint value. This current setpoint value is the product of the Full load current setpoint by
the pickup setpoint. 5
Setpoint > Control Elements > Locked Rotor
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for
this unit.
The signals related to the locked rotor pickups and operations for the three locked rotor units can be viewed at Actual >
Status > Control Elements > Locked Rotor and they are as follows:
The block signals for the locked rotor unit can be configured at: Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
Note:
The unit works with primary values.
The unit will pickup if at least one of the three phase currents are above the adjusted level. The operation value will be the
higher of the three.
5
Reset level at 97% of the pickup level.
5.6INPUTS/OUTPUTS
This section includes the Coil Supervision and mixed I/O boards, or any other board located on relay terminals F and G,
plus H and J connectors from the remote Bus Can I/O modules (CIO)
.
M IX E D S U P E R V IS IO N
T E R M IN A L S 1 2
IN P U T S
1 C C 1 C O IL 1
V
2 C C 2 5 2 /a
3 C C 3 C O IL 1
V
4 C C 4 5 2 /b
5 C C 5 C C 1
6 C C 6 C C 2
7 C C 7 C C 3
8 C C 8 C C 4
9 C O M M O N 1 /8 C O M M O N 1 /4
1 0 C O M M O N 9 /1 6 C O M M O N 5 /8
1 1 C C 9 C C 5
1 2 C C 1 0 C C 6
1 3 C C 1 1 C C 7
1 4 C C 1 2 C C 8
1 5 C C 1 3 C O IL 2
5
V
1 6 C C 1 4 5 2 /a
1 7 C C 1 5 C O IL 2
V
1 8 C C 1 6 5 2 /b
O U T P U T S
1 9
O 1
2 0 O 1
2 1
O 2
2 2
2 3 O 2
O 3
2 4
2 5
O 3 O 4
2 6
2 7
O 4 O 5
2 8
2 9
O 5 O 6
3 0
3 1 I S E N S
O 6
I
3 2
O 7
3 3
O 7
3 4 I S E N S
I
3 5
O 8 O 8
3 6
Configuration of setpoints relative to inputs and outputs can only be accessed through EnerVista 650 Setup
software, and not via the HMI. For this purpose, the user must access Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Contact I/O > Board
X, being X the corresponding I/O board.
setpoints relative to I/O boards are described in :
Table 5–85: I/O BOARD SETPOINTS
SETPOINT > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT I/O >
BOARD F > BOARD G > BOARD H > BOARD J
SETPOINT DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT STE RANGE
VALUE P
I/O board type (available only for CIO modules) I/O Board Type_H NONE N/A [NONE,
16 INP + 8OUT,
8 INP + 8OUT + SUPV]
Input activation voltage threshold Voltage Threshold A_X 80 1V [0 : 255]
Group A
Input activation voltage threshold Voltage Threshold B_X 80 1V [0 : 255]
Group B
Debounce time for Group A Debounce Time A_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group B Debounce Time B_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Input type Input Type_X_CCY (CCY) POSITIVE N/A [POSITIVE-EDGE,
NEGATIVE-EDGE,
POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE]
Input signal time delay Delay Input Time_X_CCY (CCY) 0 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Output logic type Output Logic_X_0Z POSITIVE N/A [POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE] 5
Output type Output Type_X_0Z NORMAL N/A [NORMAL,
PULSE,
LATCH]
Output pulse length Pulse Output Time_X_0Z 10000 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The snapshot event setpoint enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this unit.
Being:
5.6.3 INPUTS
Input Activation Voltage Threshold: The range of this value goes from 0 to 255 volts. There is a single setpoint for all
inputs in the same group (inputs sharing the same common). In mixed and supervision boards there are two groups of
inputs, called A and B.
Debounce Time: This is the debounce time set for inputs (1 to 50 ms). The debounce time is the time window for input
filtering. If an input suffers a change of level that lasts less than this set time, the change will not be considered. There is a
single setpoint for all inputs in the same group.
Input Type: Type of logic associated to the physical input. Possible setpoints are, positive and negative.
Positive and Negative setpoints correspond to signals that re activated or deactivated with the input level, considering the
delay setpoint. Positive-edge, and Negative-edge setpoints correspond to signals that are activated with the change of the
input signal; in this case, the Delay Input Time will not be considered, only the Debounce Time; this edge signals are
deactivated automatically after one PLC scan cycle. shows the types of signals associated to the different input
configuration types.
Delay Input Time: This is the delay applied to the input signal; the default value is zero, meaning no delay; the setpoint
range is 0 to 60000 milliseconds (1 minute). This setpoint is used in slow switchgear applications.
This is not a grouped setpoint; there is a different setpoint for each input. It is important to distinguish between this delay
input time and the debounce time used for filtering undesired transients in the input signal. The Debounce time is always
5 added to the delay input time.
5.6.4 OUTPUTS
Normal: The contact output follows the activation command. Remains active while the operation signal is active.
Pulse: The contact output remains active the time the operation signal is active plus the pulse output time,
according to the Pulse Output Time setpoint.
Latched: the output remains active after the operation signal has been cleared. The reset signal for the latched
outputs is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs > Contact Output Reset”.
Pulse Output Time_0X _0Z: This is the length of the output pulse in case the output type is selected as pulse;
the default value is 10000 ms.
Figure 5–30:shows the types of signals associated to the different output configuration types.
Circuit Supervision:
F650 units can include supervision boards (type 2), either in their internal slot F, or in an additional CIO module connected
to the unit via a CAN Bus (slots H and J). This type of board includes 4 voltage detectors for implementing tripping or
opening circuit supervision control logics.
Contact Seal-in:
The current seal-in circuit is used for verifying the current condition in a circuit during the time that the tripping contact
remains closed. If the current in the tripping circuit is maintained over 200 mA, the function is sealed independently of the
status of the function that caused the trip.
This current seal-in function in tripping circuits is mainly used in applications where auxiliary contacts 52/a (in charge of
cutting the current in the tripping circuit) are very slow. This may cause that, once the function that produced the trip is
reset, the relay contact will open before the breaker auxiliary 52/a, even if the time delay of the first has expired.
By using this function, we prevent the relay contact from cutting the current (basically inductive and high) from the tripping
circuit, which could cause damage to the unit, as these currents exceed the nominal breaking characteristics.
The circuit and the current threshold of the function are as follows:
100 mA min
In order to implement these schemes, it is not necessary to perform any setpoint in the unit. Internal functions are always
operative and provide the following logic operands:
A continuity failure is detected in a circuit when both voltage detectors (Va and Vb) detect lack of voltage during more than
500 ms. This function is not influenced by the breaker status.
These operands can be associated to internal signals (virtual outputs), LEDs or unit outputs, to issue alarm signals or to
block elements, for example for blocking the Breaker close if an anomaly is detected in the trip circuit.
Available schemes are as follows:
1. Without supervision
5
2. With current supervision (with seal-in)
3. With simple voltage supervision
4. With double voltage supervision
5. With current and simple voltage supervision (with seal-in)
6. With current and double voltage supervision (with seal-in)
7. With current and double voltage supervision (with seal-in) and serial resistor in voltage monitors.
The following subsections describe the different types of connection to create each supervision scheme in an easy way. As
the supervision circuits are identical, only the first group connection examples will be described, being also applicable to the
second group.
In order to assure a high isolation level between groups, the digital inputs for supervision have been located in a
symmetrical basis. That is to optimize the isolation between groups that can be connected to different batteries, and
therefore requiring a greater distance between circuits.
b) WITHOUT SUPERVISION
This is a very frequent common case, and we must only wire the tripping circuit to terminals F35 and F36, leaving unused
terminals F34, F15, F16, F17, F18.
Figure 5–34: SUPERVISION APPLICATION WITH AUXILIARY CONTACT 52A AND A RESISTOR (A6631F3)
There is a possibility to monitor the trip circuit and trip coil continuity. This can be done by monitoring Vdc through the
output contact when this is open.
In this table, ON means that the voltage detector V52/a is active, detecting voltage presence.
In the first case shown on the table, with closed breaker, voltage is detected by V 52/a sensor, and this means that there is
continuity in the supervised circuit.
As shown on , when the relay is not tripped, trip contact F35-F36 remains open. If the breaker is closed, its auxiliary contact
52a is closed. Therefore, a little current is flowing, about 2 mA, through terminals F15 and F16 through the voltage detector
circuit, which flows through 52/a and the tripping coil 52TC (TC = tripping coil). Current will only circulate when there is
continuity in the whole circuit, so the complete circuit is monitored, and not only the trip coil. This circuit includes auxiliary
52/a as well as the whole wiring between the battery and the relay tripping terminals, and between these and the breaker
tripping circuit.
For the second case shown on the table, open breaker, its auxiliary contact 52/a remains open, and current
cannot flow through it for detecting continuity. In order to correctly monitor the circuit, a resistor must be used,
not included in the protection, connected in parallel. The value of resistance will be selected so that the V 52/a
input circuit minimum detection current flows, but not as high as to activate the breaker-tripping coil. The figure
shows the following equation:
Where:
Vmin Is the minimum voltage, in Volts, expected in the battery (e.g. 80% of Vn)
V −15
R= min R Resistance, in kilo ohms.
2 2 2 mA of approximate current flowing through input V 52/a
As shown in the second case in the table, with an open breaker, as current will flow through R if there is continuity in the
WHOLE tripping circuit, voltage will be detected in input V 52/a.
This works correctly in steady state. However, if the breaker trips, while it is opening, the V 52/a input signal can be
deactivated without this meaning that the circuit is not correct. This is due to the fact that the tripping relay, terminals F35-
F36, short circuits input V 52/a temporarily.
Therefore, if there is a trip signal, it is admitted that no signal will be detected during a period of 1 s to allow the breaker to
open, and reopen the tripping relay F35-F36.
shows the possibility of monitoring the circuit only when the breaker is closed. In this case resistance R will not
be used, but it must be observed in the unit logic, that the corresponding signal CONT IP_F_CC16
(SUP_COIL2) will be activated showing a failure when the breaker is open, and therefore it will be required to
supervise the continuity failure signaling by the breaker status information.
Figure 5–35: TRIP CIRCUIT AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION USING AUXILIARY CONTACT 52/A. ONLY WITH
CLOSED BREAKER (A6631F5)
Figure 5–36: SUPERVISION APPLICATION WITH AUXILIARY CONTACTS 52A AND 52B (A6631F4)
There is a possibility to monitor the trip circuit continuity not only via its auxiliary contact 52/a, but also with auxiliary contact
52/b. This avoids the need to install a resistance in parallel with auxiliary 52/a. The correct connection is shown on Figure
5–36:
The circuit works in a similar way to the one described in the previous section, but it uses both supervision inputs F15-F16
and F17-F18.
The advantage in this case is that circuit supervision with 52 open is more complete, as input V 52/b is used through
contact 52/b, (that is closed when the breaker is open).
5 We must point out that in this scheme, the tripping contact, shown in the example as the F650 trip relay, can be the one in
the relay (terminals F35 and F36), or be provided by another protection or by the parallel of several protections. This
provides high flexibility in the use of this circuit.
The battery voltage can also be monitored, by using one of the standard digital inputs.
Figure 5–37: SUPERVISION APPLICATION WITH AUXILIARY CONTACTS 52A AND 52B AND SERIES RESISTOR IN
F15-F16
Virtual inputs are signals that can be written directly via communications. Their status can be established as ON (1) and
OFF (0), through writing by communications using EnerVista 650 Setup.
The change of state of virtual inputs is made according to their type. Latched virtual inputs remain at the set value until it is
changed by communications. Self-reset virtual inputs are activated by writing, and they remain active during one cycle.
There are 32 virtual inputs of each type.
Text assignment for virtual input is made at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Virtual Inputs ,but take into account that
the text assigned for virtual inputs in the relay configuration screen are only for file management, they are not sent to the
relay.
There are 512 virtual outputs that may be assigned via Logic configuration. If not assigned, the output will be forced to
.OFF. (Logic 0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the
evaluation of the logic equations. For more detail information see chapters 5.8 and 5.9 in this manual.
The input testing can only be performed in relay with graphical display, see the human interfaces section in this manual for
more detail information.
Output testing can be performed via HMI in models with graphical display and via communications through EnerVista 650
Setup in all models.
Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Force Outputs
This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay, to facilitate maintenance testing. In the screen, the user can
select the I/O board to be tested, and also select which output is to be forced (operated).
After selecting the desired output, clicking on the checkbox on the left, the user must press on the Force Output button to
activate the selected output.
In order to refresh the real status of outputs, according to the information received by the relay processor, the Refresh
button must be pressed.
The following figure shows the output-testing screen:
5.8RELAY CONFIGURATION
Setpoint > Relay Configuration
This is the relay configuration section in which the relay can be configured (all input/output and LEDs configuration,
protection elements signals, graphic display configuration, etc) using internal states or already compiled equation on PLC
Editor (see section 5.9).
5.8.1 OUTPUTS
Configuration of contact output operates and reset signals for all boards available in the device:
To configure any output it is necessary to select the output to be configured, clicking on the checkbox in the select column
and choose the logic operand in the source column. Different simple logics can be performed in this screen, using the “or”
and “not” columns, for more complex logics go to the logic configuration tool to create the virtual outputs and afterwards
select it in the source column.
The different options available in this screen are the following:
• Select checkbox enables each output. The output must be enabled before modifying any other setpoint on that output
• Name setpoint for defining identification for the output.
• Source setpoint for defining a function, logic, remote input, digital input, etc. that will activate the contact.
• OR checkbox for configuring the output operation by activation of any of the indicated signals. The unit performs an
OR of the signals, and its output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox for inverting or not the configured logic.
5.8.2 LEDS
F650 has 15 LEDs fully configurable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. First 5th are latched by hardware, the
rest are self-reset but can be latched through PLC configuration.
This window displays the entire relay LEDs with the following setpoint options for each of them:
• Select checkbox enables each LED. The LED must be enabled before modifying any other setpoint on that LED
• Name setpoint for defining identification for the LED
• Source setpoint defines which function; logic, remote input, digital input, etc. will activate the LED.
• OR checkbox for configuring the LED operation by activation of any of the indicated signals. The unit performs an OR
of the signals, and its output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox for inverting or not the configured logic.
From the LED configuration screen, it is possible to print the vertical LED label for the relay. For this purpose, press on the
printer icon. The label obtained will be similar to the default factory label, with black background and the LED texts in white.
This label can replace the original one under the black plastic cover. The label is also provided in word format and can be
modified by the user (e.g. different color marking)
5.8.3 OPERATIONS
This menu option shows the setpoints for the 24 control operations that can be programmed, as follows:
• Select checkbox enables the desired operation.
• Command Text setpoint defines the command name.
• Interlocks Type setpoint defines the desired interlock type (An interlock is a condition that must be fulfilled for an
operation to be performed). The possible options are Logic or None. If the LOGIC option is selected, the program will
enable a new window for creating the logic. If the NONE option is selected, then the following setpoint (Interlockings)
will be irrelevant.
• Interlocks setpoint define the desired interlocks. This setpoint is enabled selecting the “logic” option in “Interlock
type”. In the “Interlock logic” screen we can set the interlock logic, as shown on .
The setpoints on this screen allow creating a logic configuration with up to 3 AND gates and 1 OR gate for each of the
24 operations available in the relay. These setpoints are:
Select – Enables/disables the selection for the interlock input
Source – Selects a function, digital input, logic, etc. for defining each input of each AND gate.
NOT – Logic inverter
• Final State Type setpoint: defines whether the operation requires (in addition to the interlock logic) any other
conditions to determine a “success condition”. If so, we must select LOGIC. Otherwise, we must select NONE.
• Final State setpoint: defines the success condition of a programmed operation, if the previous setpoint (Final State
type) was set as LOGIC.
• Front Key setpoint: defines the front pushbutton from which the operation can be executed.
• Contact Input setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed by digital input. It defines the digital input to be
used for this purpose.
• Virtual Output setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed from a virtual output previously defined at the
logic configuration tool (PLC logic).
• Time Out setpoint: defines the period during which the operation command will remain activated waiting for a success
condition. If the success signal is received before this period expires, the command signal will be removed and the
timer reset. If the success condition is not received within this period of time, the operation is considered to be finished.
• COM1 (REMOTE) setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through rear port
COM1.
• COM2 (LOCAL) setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through rear port COM2.
We must note that this local port is the same as the front port (DB-9 connector). We can establish simultaneous
communication with the relay through ports COM1 and COM2. However, it is not possible to use rear COM2 and the
front port simultaneously.
• ETHER-MASTER setpoint: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through the
ETHERNET.
It must be taken into account that besides the master selection in the operations screen inside relay configuration, there is
a hardware selection (with the operation pushbutton in the front part of the relay) to switch between local (COM2 and HMI)
and remote masters (COM1 and ETHERNET) for operations.
The following diagram shows an example of the operations internal logic.
Operations Logic
Without interlock
logic
Condition 1
Interlocking
Condition n
5
Condition 1
Condition 1
Interlocking
Condition n
Keyboard
Push button Operation
Digital input
Condition 1
Success
Condition n
Finally, configure a contact output to be activated with the programmed Operation (Operation1).
This is done in the menu Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Output, selecting an output and choosing the internal signal
OPERATION BIT 1, which corresponds to the bit that is activated when the related operation is executed.
This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different protection elements. This way, the user assigns
which operands can reset the Thermal Image, which operands can initiate the autoreclose, block the protection elements,
etc. In this screen we can also configure a logic signal to perform the LED reset by communications.
The setpoints are as follows:
• Select checkbox enables/disables the selection.
• Source setpoint defines the operand that performs the function indicated in the SELECT column. NOT setpoint inverts
the block signal.
• NOT setpoint for inverting the logic signal.
• OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs an OR of the signals, and its
output produces the operation.
The following figure shows this screen:
5.8.5 OSCILLOGRAPHY
This menu is used for selecting the digital channels to be included in oscillography records, and the oscillo trigger signal. As
for the above-described setpoints, the trigger selection can be any of the signals provided by the relay or a logic
combination of these.
setpoints are described below:
• Select checkbox enables or disables a digital channel and the oscillography trigger.
• Name setpoint defines the name of the digital channel to be included in oscillography records.
• Source setpoint defines the source or signal to be recorded in that specific channel, which can be selected among all
the operands available in the signals menu.
• NOT checkbox inverts the enabled digital channel signal.
• OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs an OR of the signals, and its
output produces operation.
NOTE This screen is used for the configuration of digital channels and oscillography trigger. The rest of parameters,
such as function enabling/disabling, sampling rate, number of oscillography files, etc. must be set on the
Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography menu.
This menu is used for defining the CONTROL EVENTS, up to 128 user programmable events.
A control event is a logic signal associated to an operand or combination of operands which monitories the change of status
of the logic operand. The relay shows which events are active each time, as well as their date and time of activation.
There are 128 user programmable events and 64 pre-established events for switchgear, which correspond to opening,
closing, Error00 and Error11 of the 16 programmable switchgear elements. (Please refer to section for more detailed
information).
As for the rest of previous setpoints, the source selection can be made between:
• An operand, selecting it directly on this screen.
• An OR of several operands, selecting directly the OR column in this same menu.
• A logic combination of operands, by selecting a VIRTUAL OUTPUT as trigger source, and using the logic configuration
available in the relay, graphical PLC, that allows to design logic circuits and to assign their outputs to internal variables,
called VIRTUAL OUTPUT.
Available setpoints are as follows:
• Select checkbox: enables or disables the generation of each event.
• Name setpoint: defines the text for each control event.
• Source setpoint defines the source that will trigger the event. The source is chosen from the list that shows all the
operands available in the unit.
• NOT checkbox inverts the selected signal.
5 • OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs an OR of the signals, and its
output produces operation.
• Alarm checkbox: allows treating the event as an alarm and making the event activation to be reported on the alarm
panel.
ACTIVE status is shown on the display (relay HMI), showing an ON label on the right of the alarm. The PC will show the
alarm text in red color. 5
ACKNOWLEDGED: Operation acknowledgement can be performed from three independent channels: MMI-COM2 (local),
COM1 (remote) and COM3 (Ethernet). Inactive alarms disappear from the HMI when being acknowledged.
HMI: Acknowledged status is shown on the HMI with a selection mark on the right of the ON label.
EnerVista 650 Setup: the acknowledged status is shown by a selection mark to the left of the Operation name.
5.8.7 SWITCHGEAR
This menu is used for defining the SWITCHGEAR elements to be controlled by the relay. A switchgear element can be a
breaker, a line selector switch, a grounding selector switch, a busbar selector switch, etc. It is possible to define up to 16
switchgear elements. The setpoints are as follows:
• Select checkbox: enables or disables the control of a new switchgear element
• Contacts setpoint: allows selecting which type of contact is used for monitoring the status (open/closed) of the
element. The selection can be: 52a (contact type A, showing the same status as the represented element), 52b
(opposite status to the represented element), 52a+52b (both types of contacts are used), NONE (no status
monitoring).
• Opening Time setpoint: defines the maximum opening time of an element. It is used for issuing an opening time
failure signal if the element opening is not produced within this time.
• Closing Time setpoint: defines the maximum closing time of an element. It is used for issuing a closing time failure
signal if the element closing is not produced within this time.
• Contact A checkbox: allows selecting which operand or combination of operands activate the type A contact status.
Usually it will be an input contact wired to type A contact of the element (Breaker/selector switch). This column and the
next two columns are only active if the selected contact type in the Contacts column is 52a or 52a+52b.
• OR checkbox: selects a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs and OR of the signals, and its
output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox inverts the status of the signal selected in column Contact A.
• Contact B checkbox: allows selecting which operand or combination of operands activates the type B contact status.
Usually it will be an input contact wired to type B contact of the element (Breaker/selector switch). This column and the
5 next two columns are only active if the selected contact type in the Contacts column is 52b or 52a+52b.
• OR checkbox selects a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs and OR of the signals, and
its output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox inverts the status of the signal selected in column Contact B.
• Open text setpoint: allows associating a text to the control event associated to the element opening.
• Close text setpoint: allows associating a text to the control event associated to the element closing.
• Error 00 text setpoint: in case of using double contact for the switchgear element status (52a+52b), this setpoint
allows to associate a text to the Error00 internal status, this means, when both contacts are inactive during a period
longer than the associated to the opening or closing Operation, depending on which Operation is being performed.
• Error 11 text setpoint: in case of using double contact for the switchgear element status (52a+52b), this setpoint
allows to associate a text to the Error11 internal status, this means, when both contacts are active during a period
longer than the associated to the opening or closing Operation, depending on which Operation is being performed.
• ALARM setpoint: enables the issue of an alarm in the event of a close, open, 00-type, 11-type error. If it is configured
as an alarm.
• Opening init setpoint: this setpoint selects which operand or combination of operands indicate the initiation of an
opening operation, in order to allow the follow up of the operation and generate the corresponding alarms if the
operation is not successful. The operation bit signal used to launch the opening init must be configured in the
operations tab inside relay configuration.
• Closing init setpoint: this setpoint selects which operand or combination of operands indicate the initiation of a closing
operation, in order to allow the follow up of the operation and generate the corresponding alarms if the operation is not
successful. The operation bit signal used to launch the opening init must be configured in the operations tab inside
relay configuration.
On the left side of the window all the available elements to be programmed on the HMI are displayed. Their meaning is
detailed on the right.
Table 5–96: ACTIVE SYMBOLS CONFIGURABLE IN ONE-LINE DIAGRAM FOR GRAPHICAL HMI
ACTIVE SYMBOLS
ICONS IN SCREEN DESCRIPTION
SWITCHGEAR SYMBOLS
These symbols correspond to switchgear elements: breaker (square) and selector switch
(rhombus), in vertical and horizontal positions. It is necessary to associate the figure to its
corresponding switchgear number. The figure is shown filled if the element is closed, and
blank if the element is open. The symbol on the right represents an unpluggable breaker.
In this case it is necessary to indicate which operands show whether the element is
plugged or unplugged. The figure shows also graphically these two statuses.
MULTISTATE VARIABLE SYMBOL
Displays on screen a dialog box that is one variable status function (like a switch case) for
the following internal states AR STATUS, AR LOCKOUT MODE, AR BLOCK MODE and
FAULT TYPE.
This type of data allows to visualize the different states of one particular value, for
example, AR STATUS has several states such as (0) OUT OF SERVICE, (1) READY, (2)
LOCKOUT, (3) BLOCK, (4) RECLOSE IN PROGRESS. Significant texts can be
associated with those states.
STATUS SYMBOLS (TEXT AND GRAPHIC MODES):
BitRepresents the state of an operand by means of a configurable text. It allows
associating a test to the active status and a different text to the inactive status.
Led(O)Performs the same function in a graphical mode. This way, it works as a virtual
LED. When showing a black circle, it means that the selected operand is active, and if the
circle is blank, the operand is inactive
5 ANALOG MAGNITUDE SYMBOL
Used for displaying analog magnitudes (current, voltage, power, etc.) in floating point
numbers, such as a current value (123.5 A). Both the number of decimals and the integer
characters can be selected, in order to facilitate the reading. Any of the analog
magnitudes available in the relay can be configured
DATE AND TIME SYMBOL
Symbol used for displaying in the HMI the date and time provided by the device.
OPERATIONS SYMBOL:
This symbol indicates de possibility to configure and execute operations on the graphic
display. This symbol can only be selected once the operations have already been
configured in the “Operations” screen of the “Relay Configuration” menu. To select an
Operation, click on the element and then on the display. The program will show a window
to select the required operation among the displayed options, and the tab order. Once
selected, a red border square will be shown. Place this square on the object to be
operated. When the operated object is selected on the screen to execute this operation,
the object on which it is located will blink. It is possible to place several operations on the
same object, for example to open and close the breaker object.
Transformers representation
The F650 logic allows setpoint the relay logic configuration using a sophisticated and complete program based on standard
IEC 61131-3, with block diagrams, which is described in this section.
5.9.1 INTRODUCTION
The logic configuration (or PLC Editor) tool is a graphical design tool that allows the F650 built complex logic diagram in an
easy way using different logic functions.
The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the IEC 61131-3 standard.
• This standard defines five basic ways of programming:
• Sequential Function Chart (SFC).
• Instruction List (IL).
• Structured Text (ST).
• Ladder Diagram (LD).
• Function Block Diagram (FBD).
Out of these five methods, FBD has been chosen because it allows for graphical configurations that are more
comprehensive. This method provides the possibility of grouping several basic functions inside a single function (hereon
called libraries), achieving higher modularity and clarity in the design.
5
Please take note of the following remarks:
The first equation entered in the PLC can never be a timer
Analog elements (analog comparators, etc,) are not implemented.
5.9.2.1 DESCRIPTION
As already mentioned in the introduction, this tool uses FBD mode of IEC 61131-3 standard. For this purpose we have
defined a series of basic operations with illustrations below.
The basic operations available in PLC Editor are located in the tool bar of the application and are as follows:
LIBRARY: Possibility to build blocks of logic in a simple graphic object. OR and AND from 3 to 8 inputs are provided
as libraries.
AND of two digital inputs.
ONS: signal to pulse an logic input to a signal of one scan cycle length.
TIMER: timer signal with set, reset and mask for timing.
Flip-Flop D : signal that maintains the actual value frozen during a PLC cycle
1
O
utp
ut
0
1
O
utp
ut
0
1
O
utp
ut
0
1
R
ESE
Tin
p u
t
0
1
Ou
tpu
t
0
T(ms) T1 T2 T1
+ T2
= T
DAT OPERATION
COMPILATIO
PLC
EQUATIONS
PLC 5
Figure 5–50: COMPILED LOGIC EQUATIONS
A single equation is composed of one or more inputs, one or more operations, and one output. The order of equations is
determined by the relative position of their outputs.
In the following example is shown the order of compilation for equations determined by their relative position in the
configuration file:
EQUATIONA EQUATIONAOUTPUT
EQUATIONB EQUATIONBOUTPUT
EQUATIONA EQUATIONBOUTPUT
EQUATIONB EQUATIONAOUTPUT
In this case, equation A is the first to be executed. However, in the second case, the first equation to be executed would be
B, as its output is before the Equation A output.
The PLC Editor tool (Setpoint > Logic Configuration ) provides a main menu with different submenus (File, Project, Edit,
Run, View, and Window) that allows the user to built customized logic for the F650 devices.
Libraries can contain a set of operations grouped in a single graphic object being formed by inputs, outputs and operations
Working with libraries follows the same procedure as working in the main project menu, the only difference is that the inputs
and outputs to the library must be selected as external inputs and outputs. The rest of variables are internal variables used
in the logic compilation.
The name assigned to the inputs and outputs of the library and to the library itself will be ones used to represent the library
as an object in the main project.
Internal variables inside the libraries will be assigned randomly when compiling.
These libraries are saved in the LIB folder in order to be used in further projects
Green and blue signals are internal inputs and outputs used in the library and are not going to be accessible to the user
when working in the main menu outside the library environment. The white boxes (T_Input, T_Pickup, T_Dropout,
T_output) are inputs and outputs to the library that are going to be accessible to the user to connect the library in the main
application to create virtual outputs to be sent to the relay.
Once the library is created and saved it can be selected in the main application menu in Project > Insert Library. The
library will have the following object:
In this section a simple logic application is described step by step, a logic is such that keeping one digital input
activated, several outputs will be activated and deactivated in a time window (outputs will remain activated for
200 ms and deactivated for 5 ms). See the following figure:
6.1.1 LEDS
Operation of the relay front LEDs is shown on the following figure (Actual > Front Panel > LEDs) by the lighting of the
associated LED in the appropriate color. The Ready LED is green when the relay is in service. LEDs 1 to 5 light up in red
when active, LEDs 6 to 10 light up in orange, and the last 5 LEDs light up in green.
The first five LEDs are latched by hardware and can only be reset by a LEDs RESET Command, either pressing the “esc”
key on the Front of the Relay, or by Communications using the appropriate signal. The rest of LEDs are not latched, but can
be latched by logic.
Table 6–1: FRONT PANEL LEDS
LEDS
READY LED
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
LED 9
LED 10
LED 11
LED 12
LED 13
LED 14
6
LED 15
LOCAL OPERATION MODE
OPERATIONS BLOCKED
6.2.2 BREAKER
The signals associated to the opened or closed status of the breaker can be monitored at “Actual > Status > Breaker”
Table 6–3: BREAKER STATUS
BREAKER STATUS
BREAKER OPEN
BREAKER CLOSED
BREAKER UNDEFINED
BREAKER OPEN: Open breaker status. In the switchgear selected as breaker, besides providing the usual
switchgear contact status, the system provides also the open breaker, closed breaker, and
6 undefined breaker states.
BREAKER CLOSED: Breaker closed.
BREAKER UNDEFINED: If there are two digital inputs configured for breaker contacts 52/a and 52/b, this status will be
present when both inputs are at 0 or at 1. This status can be caused by a wiring failure, failure of
auxiliary elements, etc.
6.2.3 PROTECTION
NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK NEUTRAL TOC2 BLOCK GROUND DIR2 BLK INP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH BLK
NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK NEUTRAL TOC3 BLOCK GROUND DIR3 BLK INP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH BLK
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK GROUND TOC1 BLOCK SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK
GROUND IOC2 BLOCK GROUND TOC2 BLOCK SENS GND DIR2 BLK IP NEUTRAL OV2 LOW BLK
GROUND IOC3 BLOCK GROUND TOC3 BLOCK SENS GND DIR3 BLK IP NEUTRAL OV3 LOW BLK
SENS GND IOC1 BLK SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK POWER BLOCKS AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK
SENS GND IOC2 BLK SENS GND TOC2 BLOCK FWD PWR1 BLOCK AUXILIARY UV2 BLOCK
SENS GND IOC3 BLK SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK FWD PWR2 BLOCK AUXILIARY UV3 BLOCK
ISOLATED GROUND BLOCKS NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK FWD PWR3 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND1 BLK NEG SEQ TOC2 BLOCK DIR PWR1 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV2 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND2 BLK NEG SEQ TOC3 BLOCK DIR PWR2 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV3 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND3 BLK THERMAL MODEL BLOCKS DIR PWR3 BLOCK NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK
SETTING GROUPS BLOCK IP THERMAL1 BLOCK FREQUENCY BLOCKS NEG SEQ OV2 BLOCK
SETT GROUPS BLOCK THERMAL2 BLOCK OVERFREQ1 BLOCK NEG SEQ OV3 BLOCK
THERMAL3 BLOCK OVERFREQ2 BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR BLK
BROKEN CONDUCTOR BLK OVERFREQ3 BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR2 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT2 BLK UNDERFREQ2 BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR3 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT3 BLK UNDERFREQ3 BLOCK
6 GROUND IOC1 OP
GROUND IOC2 PKP
GROUND TOC1 OP
GROUND TOC2 PKP
GROUND DIR1 OP
GROUND DIR2 BLOCK
GROUND IOC2 OP GROUND TOC2 OP GROUND DIR2 OP
GROUND IOC3 PKP GROUND TOC3 PKP GROUND DIR3 BLOCK
GROUND IOC3 OP GROUND TOC3 OP GROUND DIR3 OP
THERMAL1 A RST
THERMAL1 ALARM
THERMAL1 A ALRM
THERMAL1 OP
THERMAL1 A OP THERMAL1 IMAGE A
6
THERMAL1 B RST THERMAL1 B ALRM THERMAL1 B OP THERMAL1 IMAGE B
THERMAL1 C RST THERMAL1 C ALRM THERMAL1 C OP THERMAL1 IMAGE C
THERMAL2 ALARM THERMAL2 OP
THERMAL2 A RST THERMAL2 A ALRM THERMAL2 A OP THERMAL2 IMAGE A
THERMAL2 B RST THERMAL2 B ALRM THERMAL2 B OP THERMAL2 IMAGE B
THERMAL2 C RST THERMAL2 C ALRM THERMAL2 C OP THERMAL2 IMAGE C
THERMAL3 ALARM THERMAL3 OP
THERMAL3 A RST THERMAL3 A ALRM THERMAL3 A OP THERMAL3 IMAGE A
THERMAL3 B RST THERMAL3 B ALRM THERMAL3 B OP THERMAL3 IMAGE B
THERMAL3 C RST THERMAL3 C ALRM THERMAL3 C OP THERMAL3 IMAGE C
6.2.3.8 VOLTAGE
This screen shows the activation of all voltage elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu: Actual >
Status > Protection > Voltage, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
The values shown are:
Pickup and operation signals for phase to ground and phase-to-phase undervoltage elements and the three-phase signal
for pickup and operation for the undervoltage element.
Pickup and operation for negative sequence overvoltage element.
Pickup and operation signals for phase-to-phase overvoltage elements and the three-phase signal for pickup and operation
for the overvoltage element.
Pickup and operation for neutral overvoltage elements (High and low).
Pickup and operation for auxiliary undervoltage and overvoltage elements.
Table 6–11: VOLTAGE ACTUAL VALUES
UNDERVOLTAGE ACTUAL VALUES OVERVOLTAGE ACTUAL NEUTRAL OV (HIGH AND LOW)
VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
PHASE UV1 A PKP PHASE UV2 PKP PHASE OV1 AB PKP NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 A OP PHASE UV2 OP PHASE OV1 AB OP NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 B PKP PHASE UV3 A PKP PHASE OV1 BC PKP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 B OP PHASE UV3 A OP PHASE OV1 BC OP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 C PKP PHASE UV3 B PKP PHASE OV1 CA PKP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 C OP PHASE UV3 B OP PHASE OV1 CA OP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 AB PKP PHASE UV3 C PKP PHASE OV1 PKP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 AB OP PHASE UV3 C OP PHASE OV1 OP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 BC PKP PHASE UV3 AB PKP PHASE OV2 AB PKP NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 BC OP PHASE UV3 AB OP PHASE OV2 AB OP NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 CA PKP PHASE UV3 BC PKP PHASE OV2 BC PKP NEUTRAL OV3 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 CA OP PHASE UV3 BC OP PHASE OV2 BC OP NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 PKP PHASE UV3 CA PKP PHASE OV2 CA PKP AUXILIARY OV
6 PHASE UV1 OP PHASE UV3 CA OP PHASE OV2 CA OP AUXILIARY OV1 PKP
PHASE UV2 A PKP PHASE UV3 PKP PHASE OV2 PKP AUXILIARY OV1 OP
PHASE UV2 A OP PHASE UV3 OP PHASE OV2 OP AUXILIARY OV2 PKP
PHASE UV2 B PKP PHASE OV3 AB PKP AUXILIARY OV2 OP
PHASE UV2 B OP PHASE OV3 AB OP AUXILIARY OV3 PKP
PHASE UV2 C PKP PHASE OV3 BC PKP AUXILIARY OV3 OP
PHASE UV2 C OP PHASE OV3 BC OP AUXILIARY UV
PHASE UV2 AB PKP PHASE OV3 CA PKP AUXILIARY UV1 PKP
PHASE UV2 AB OP PHASE OV3 CA OP AUXILIARY UV1 OP
PHASE UV2 BC PKP PHASE OV3 PKP AUXILIARY UV2 PKP
PHASE UV2 BC OP PHASE OV3 OP AUXILIARY UV2 OP
PHASE UV2 CA PKP AUXILIARY UV3 PKP
PHASE UV2 CA OP AUXILIARY UV3 OP
6.2.3.9 POWER
Forward Power and directional power elements
There are three identical forward power and three directional power detection elements, each of them with two power-
setting levels.
Represented statuses are basically Pickup and Trip (Operation) for each step in each function.
This functions may have several applications, for example, small generating plants connected to the power system, to limit
the supplied power and not to exceed its rated capacity.
If programmed conditions for any of the three elements are met, the corresponding LEDs will light up.
This screen shows the activation of all power elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu: Actual>
Status > Protection >Power, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
6.2.4.1 FREQUENCY
F650 units incorporate three overfrequency and three underfrequency units. For each of them there are two magnitudes
pickup and trip (operation).
Frequency elements are often used in generating plants, as well as in the connection of substations to the main system.
Frequency monitoring is the base for synchronous machines protection application, with a couple of setting levels, as well
as for the development of automatic shedding functions and underfrequency reset.
This screen shows the activation of all frequency elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu:
Actual> Status > Control Elements >Frequency, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
Table 6–13: FREQUENCY ACTUAL VALUES
OVERFREQUENCY ACTUAL VALUES UNDERFREQUENCY ACTUAL VALUES
OVERFREQ1 PKP UNDERFREQ1 PKP
OVERFREQ1 OP UNDERFREQ1 OP
OVERFREQ2 PKP UNDERFREQ2 PKP
OVERFREQ2 OP UNDERFREQ2 OP
OVERFREQ3 PKP UNDERFREQ3 PKP
OVERFREQ3 OP UNDERFREQ3 OP
6.2.4.2 SYNCHROCHECK
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Synchrocheck, and it includes the following
signaling LEDs for the synchronism check function:
Table 6–14: SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES
SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP
6 SYNCROCHECK OP
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
SYNCROCHECK COND OP
DL-DB OPERATION
DL-LB OPERATION
LL-DB OPERATION
SLIP CONDITION
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP: Block signal for the synchrocheck unit, configurable at Setpoint > Relay Configuration >
Protection Elements
SYNCROCHECK OP: Closing permission signal in live line-live bus conditions with open breaker.
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM: General Closing permission of the Synchronism unit. It contemplates all possible situations,
live line-live bus conditions, and the closing permission logics (dead line-dead bus, live line-
dead bus, dead line-live bus). Note: in case the Function is disabled, the Closing permission
signal will be activated in order not to interfere with possible logics where it is included. If the
synchronism unit is enabled, this signal will only be activated in the closing conditions
established by setting.
SYNCROCHECK COND OP: Closing permission according to permission logics (DL-DB, LL-DB, DL-LB).
DL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – dead bus condition.
DL-LB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – live bus condition.
6.2.4.3 AUTORECLOSE
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Autoreclose, and it includes the following
signaling LEDs for the Autoreclose function:
Table 6–15: AUTORECLOSE ACTUAL VALUES
AUTORECLOSE INPUTS
AR LEVEL BLOCK
AR PULSE BLOCK
AR PULSE UNBLOCK
AR INITIATE
AR CONDS INPUT
AUTORECLOSE INTERNAL STATUS
AR CLOSE BREAKER
AR OUT OF SERVICE
AR READY
AR LOCKOUT
AR BLOCK
AR RCL IN PROGRESS
AR LCK BY ANOMALY
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE
AR LCK BY USER
AR LCK BY CONDS 6
AR LCK BY TRIPS
AR LCK BY SHOTS
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
AR BLOCK BY PULSE
AR STATUS
AR LOCKOUT MODE
AR BLOCK MODE
The AUTORECLOSE INPUTS are signal configurable by the user at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements to:
AR LEVEL BLOCK: programmable signal to block the autoreclose unit by level
AR PULSE BLOCK: programmable signal to block the autoreclose unit by pulse
AR PULSE UNBLOCK: programmable signal to block the autoreclose unit by pulse
AR INITIATE: programmable signal to initiate the autoreclose.
AR CONDS INPUT: programmable signal to set the conditions to be met before executing a breaker close.
The AUTORECLOSE INTERNAL STATUS are internal signals provided by the autoreclose unit:
AR CLOSE BREAKER: Breaker close command given by the autoreclose
AR OUT OF SERVICE: Autoreclose out of service (Disabled)
AR READY: Autoreclose in service
AR LOCKOUT: Autoreclose in lockout status (finished cycled-definite trip)
AR BLOCK: Autoreclose blocked (by input, logic, others, etc).
AR RCL IN PROGRESS: Cycle in course (autoreclose in progress).
AR LCK BY ANOMALY: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by anomaly.
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by a failure in opening the breaker.
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by a failure in closing the breaker.
AR LCK BY USER: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by manual close.
AR LCK BY CONDS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by conditions. See input conditions configuration.
AR LCK BY TRIPS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by maximum number of trips.
AR LCK BY SHOTS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” at the end of cycle – Definite trip.
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 1st shot.
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 2nd shot.
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 3rd shot.
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 4th shot.
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL: Autoreclose blocked by level. See AR block signals configuration
AR BLOCK BY PULSE: Autoreclose blocked by pulse. See AR block signals configuration
AR STATUS: Autoreclose status (in service – out of service)
AR LOCKOUT MODE: Relay “Lockout” status.
6 AR BLOCK MODE: Relay “Block” status
BKR FAIL INITIATE External signal for breaker failure initiation. (configurable at Settings> Relay Configuration >
Protection Elements).
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT Signal for breaker failure without current
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION Signal for supervision level breaker failure (retrip)
BKR FAIL HISET Signal for high-level breaker failure
BKR FAIL LOWSET Signal for low-level breaker failure
INTERNAL ARC Signal for internal arc
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Signal for Second level breaker failure (high and low)
Actual > Status > Snapshot Event Summary Thermal Model3 Event
The F650 provides via setting the possibility to enable or Phase Directional1 Event
disable the snapshot event generation in the different Phase Directional2 Event
functions available in the device. Phase Directional3 Event
Neutral Directional1 Event
This screen shows a complete listing of the snapshot event
generation for all the protection, control and inputs/outputs Neutral Directional2 Event
elements in the relay, showing their status (enabled or not) Neutral Directional3 Event
through the corresponding LED. Ground Directional1 Event
Ground Directional2 Event
Table 6–22: SNAPSHOT EVENT SUMMARY
Ground Directional3 Event
SNAPSHOT EVENTS Breaker Failure Event
SUMMARY
VT Fuse Failure Event
Board F Event
Synchrocheck Event
Board G Event
Autoreclose Event
General Settings Event
Neutral OV1 High Event
Phase IOC1 High Event
Neutral OV2 High Event
Phase IOC2 High Event
Neutral OV3 High Event
Phase IOC3 High Event
Neutral OV1 Low Event
Phase IOC1 Low Event
Neutral OV2 Low Event
Phase IOC2 Low Event
Neutral OV3 Low Event
Phase IOC3 Low Event
Auxiliary UV1 Event
Neutral IOC1 Event
Auxiliary UV2 Event
Neutral IOC2 Event
Auxiliary UV3 Event
Neutral IOC3 Event
Phase OV1 Event
Ground IOC1 Event
Phase OV2 Event
Ground IOC2 Event
Phase OV3 Event
Ground IOC3 Event
Auxiliary OV1 Event
6 Sensitive Ground
IOC1 Event Auxiliary OV2 Event
Sensitive Ground Auxiliary OV3 Event
IOC2 Event Negative Sequence TOC1 Event
Sensitive Ground Negative Sequence TOC2 Event
IOC3 Event
Negative Sequence TOC3 Event
Phase TOC1 High Event
Overfrequency1 Event
Phase TOC2 High Event
Overfrequency2 Event
Phase TOC3 High Event
Overfrequency3 Event
Neutral TOC1 Event
Underfrequency1 Event
Neutral TOC2 Event
Underfrequency2 Event
Neutral TOC3 Event
Underfrequency3 Event
Ground TOC1 Event
Oscillography Event
Ground TOC2 Event
Fault Report Event
Ground TOC3 Event
Setting Group Event
Sensitive Ground TOC1 Event
Broken Conductor1 Event
Sensitive Ground TOC2 Event
Broken Conductor2 Event
Sensitive Ground TOC3 Event
Broken Conductor3 Event
Phase UV1 Event
Isolated Ground IOC1 Event
Phase UV2 Event
Isolated Ground IOC2 Event
Phase UV3 Event
Isolated Ground IOC3 Event
Negative Sequence OV1 Event
Sensitive Ground Directional1
Negative Sequence OV2 Event Event
Negative Sequence OV3 Event Sensitive Ground Directional2
Thermal Model1 Event Event
Thermal Model2 Event
The ModBus User Map consists of a selection of the most important 256 records in the complete ModBus Map regarding
the application. By selecting these records and defining the user map appropriately, it is possible to read all the information
included by a single ModBus reading operation, optimizing the refresh time.
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > ModBus User Map, and it includes all the readings for the previously
configured records in the ModBus memory map.
Table 6–23: MODBUS USER MAP ACTUAL VALUES
MODBUS USER MAP
Address 00
Address 01
…
Address 255
SWITCH X A INPUT The LED will light up when the input associated to that switchgear Contact A is activated.
SWITCH X B INPUT The LED will light up when the input associated to that switchgear Contact B is activated.
SWITCH X A STATUS Status associated to Switchgear contact A. It is activated once the time required for the
Switchgear module to acknowledge contact A has expired.
6 SWITCH X B STATUS Status associated to Switchgear contact B. It is activated once the time required for the
Switchgear module to acknowledge contact B has expired..
SWITCH X OPEN Lights up when the associated switchgear is open
SWITCH X CLOSED Lights up when the associated switchgear is closed
SWITCH X 00_ERROR Output that represents the Switchgear status 00, considered as abnormal.
SWITCH X 11_ERROR Output that represents the Switchgear status 11, considered as abnormal.
SWITCH X OPEN INIT Programmable input that indicates the initiation of the Opening Operation for the considered
switchgear.
SWITCH X CLOSE INIT Programmable input that indicates the initiation of the closing Operation for the considered
switchgear.
SWGR X FAIL TO OPEN Output that represents a failure to open, from the associated external device (opening time
exceeded)
SWGR X FAIL TO CLOSE Output that represents a failure to close from the associated external device (closing time
exceeded)
SW IT C H X A SW IT CH X A ST AT US
IN PU T
SW ITC H X B SW IT C H X B ST AT U S
IN PUT
SW IT C H X O PEN
SW IT C H X
CLO SED
Sw itchgear logic
m odule SW IT C H X
00 ER R O R
SW IT C H X
11 ERR O R
6.2.9 CALIBRATION
6
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Calibration, and it includes the internal calibration status for the relay.
Table 6–25: CALIBRATION STATUS
CALIBRATION
FACTORY CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION ERROR
FACTORY CALIBRATION: this value will be active when the relay calibration settings are the default values (no
calibration).
CALIBRATION ERROR: Error shown when there is a problem in the calibration settings (wrong values).
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Flex Curves, and it includes the internal flex curves status.
If the LED associated to the FlexCurve status is lit up, this indicates that the user curve has been configured with new
values (not default values).
Table 6–26: FLEX CURVES STATUS
FLEX CURVES STATUS
FLEXCURVE A STATUS
FLEXCURVE B STATUS
FLEXCURVE C STATUS
FLEXCURVE D STATUS
This screen can monitor the system parameters and the internal status of the Relay operative system. It is only available
with password provided by the manufacturer.
This screen shows part of the information related to the different records stored in the Relay, such as:
6 FAULT DATE
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT REPORT NUMBER
FAULT REPORT TRIGG: This signal indicates whether the signal that initiates the calculation of the distance to the fault
has been activated.
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: This signal indicates the reset of fault reports.
FAULT DATE: Date and time of the last fault produced in the relay. In format (Day/Month/year
Hour:minutes:seconds.milliseconds)
FAULT TYPE: Type of the last fault produced in the Relay (phase to ground, phase to phase, three-phase,
etc).
FAULT LOCATION: Location of the last fault produced in the relay.
FAULT REPORT NUMBER: Number of fault reports available in the relay (ten is the maximum number of records
supported by the relay).
6.2.12.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
Actual> Status > Records Status > Oscillography
The following figure shows the status of the different digital channels that can be programmed to be included in
oscillography records. When the signal associated to a specific channel is active, its LED will light up on this screen.
This screen shows as well the oscillography trigger status, active or inactive, by lighting up that channel.
Table 6–29: OSCILLOGRAPHY STATUS
OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
OSC DIG CHANNEL 5 6
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
OSC DIG CHANNEL 8
OSC DIG CHANNEL 9
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
OSCILLO TRIGGER
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS
CYCLES PER RECORD
AVAILABLE RECORDS
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: Date and time of the oldest value stored in the data logger.
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: Date and time of the most recent value stored in the data logger
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS: Number of channels configured in the data logger
DATA LOGGER DAYS: Time in days during which, samples are stored without overwriting them.
6.2.12.5 DEMAND
Actual> Status > Records Status > Demand
Table 6–31: DEMAND STATUS
DEMAND
DEMAND TRIGGER INP
DEMAND RESET INP
DEMAND TRIGGER INP: Signal used for triggering the demand in the case of Rolling demand.
DEMAND RESET INP: Signal to reset the demand.
6 These signals can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
6.2.12.6 ENERGY
Freeze/Unfreeze/reset Energy: These signals correspond to the relay energy counters statuses of freeze, unfreeze and
reset.
Actual> Status > Records Status > Energy
Table 6–32: ENERGY STATUS
ENERGY
FREEZE ENERGY CNT
UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT
RESET ENERGY CNT
FREEZE ENERGY CNT: Signal used to freeze the energy counters for measurement purposes.
UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT: Signal used to unfreeze the energy counters.
RESET ENERGY CNT: Signal to reset the energy measurements and set the values to zero.
These signals can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
The breaker maintenance inputs are signals that can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements:
RESET KI2t COUNTERS Signal to reset and set to zero all the KI2t counters (for all phases)
RESET BKR COUNTERS Signal to reset and set to zero all the breaker counters (number of openings and closings
and alarms)
6
KI2t PHASE A ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase A exceeded
KI2t PHASE B ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase B exceeded
KI2t PHASE C ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase C exceeded
BKR OPENINGS ALARM Alarm related to the maximum number of breaker openings
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM Alarm related to the maximum number of breaker openings in one hour
BREAKER OPENINGS Counter of the total number of openings performed by the breaker
BREAKER CLOSINGS Counter of the total number of closings performed by the breaker
KI2t PHASE A kI2t phase A counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase A)
KI2t PHASE B kI2t phase B counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase B)
KI2t PHASE C kI2t phase C counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase C)
BKR OPENING TIME Time to set a failure in opening the breaker.
BKR CLOSING TIME Time to set a failure in closing the breaker.
Breaker opening and closing time signals are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear
for the related switchgear device.
6.3METERING
Values shown in each section are as follows:
6.3.1.1 CURRENT
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Current
6.3.1.2 VOLTAGE
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage
Table 6–35: VOLTAGE PRIMARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
PT Ratio N/A
Va Angle Deg
Vb Angle Deg
Vc Angle Deg
Vn Angle Deg
Vx Angle Deg
Vab Angle Deg
Vbc Angle Deg
Vca Angle Deg
V0 Primary KV
V1 Primary KV
V2 Primary KV
Vab Primary KV
Vbc Primary KV
Vca Primary KV
Va Primary KV
Vb Primary KV
Vc Primary KV
Vn Primary KV
Vx Primary KV
VBB Primary KV
VL Primary KV
6.3.1.3 POWER 6
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Power
Table 6–36: POWER PRIMARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phase A Real Pwr MW
Phase A Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase A Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase B Real Pwr MW
Phase B Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase B Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase C Real Pwr MW
Phase C Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase C Apparent Pwr MVA
3 Phase Real Pwr MW
3 Phase Reactive Pwr MVAr
3 Phase Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase A Power Factor N/A
Phase B Power Factor N/A
Phase C Power Factor N/A
3 Phase Power Factor N/A
NOTE: If voltage inputs are configured in Delta connection and the auxiliary voltage input is set as Vx, measurement of
single phase power value cannot be duly calculated, and therefore, its value will be zero. For the three-phase power value,
the system uses the ARON method, or two-wattmeters method.
6.3.1.4 ENERGY
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Energy
Energy is only given in three phase primary values
Table 6–37: ENERGY PRIMARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Positive MWatthour MWh
Negative MWatthour MWh
Positive MVarhour MVArh
Negative MVarhour MVArh
Pos Mwatthour Cnt MWh
Neg Mwatthour Cnt MWh
Pos MVarhour Cnt MVArh
Neg MVarhour Cnt MVArh
When the energy counters reach the value (2ˆ 31)/1000 (approximately. 2147 MVArh and MWh) all the values are set to
zero and starts counting again.
6.3.1.5 DEMAND
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Demand
Demand is only given in primary values
Table 6–38: DEMAND PRIMARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
DEMAND IA KA
DEMAND IA MAX KA
DEMAND IA DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IB KA
6 DEMAND IB MAX
DEMAND IB DATE
KA
dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IC KA
DEMAND IC MAX KA
DEMAND IC DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IG KA
DEMAND IG MAX KA
DEMAND IG DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND ISG KA
DEMAND ISG MAX KA
DEMAND ISG DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND I2 KA
DEMAND I2 MAX KA
DEMAND I2 DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND W MW
DEMAND W MAX MW
DEMAND W DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND VAR PWR MVAr
DEMAND VAR MAX MVAr
DEMAND VAR DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND VA PWR MVA
DEMAND VA MAX MVA
DEMAND VA DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
6.3.2.1 CURRENT
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Current
Table 6–39: CURRENT SECONDARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phasor Ia A
RMS Ia A
Phasor Ib A
RMS Ib A
Phasor Ic A
RMS Ic A
Phasor In A
Phasor Ig A
RMS Ig A
Phasor Isg A
RMS Isg A
Zero seq I0 A
Positive Seq I1 A
Negative Seq I2 A
6.3.2.2 VOLTAGE
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Voltage
Table 6–40: VOLTAGE SECONDARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phasor Vab
Phasor Vbc
V
V
6
Phasor Vca V
Phasor Van V
Phasor Vbn V
Phasor Vcn V
Phasor Vn V
Positive Seq V1 V
Negative Seq V2 V
Zero Seq V0 V
Phasor Vx V
Nominal Voltage V
Line Voltage V
Bus Voltage V
6.3.2.3 POWER
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Power
Table 6–41: POWER SECONDARY VALUES
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phase A Apparent Pwr VA
Phase B Apparent Pwr VA
Phase C Apparent Pwr VA
Phase A Real Pwr W
Phase B Real Pwr W
Phase C Real Pwr W
Phase A Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase B Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase C Reactive Pwr VARS
3 Phase Apparent Pwr VA
3 Phase Real Pwr W
3 Phase Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase A Power Factor N/A
Phase B Power Factor N/A
Phase C Power Factor N/A
3 Phase Power Factor N/A
NOTE: If voltage inputs are configured in Delta connection and the auxiliary voltage input is set as Vx, measurement of
single phase power value cannot be duly calculated, and therefore, its value will be zero. For the three-phase power value,
the system uses the ARON method, or two-wattmeters method.
6.3.4 FREQUENCY
Digital inputs and outputs are located in the same board. Depending on the relay model, the number of inputs and outputs
will vary as:
If the relay model is F650***F1*** the unit will incorporate 1 board (F) with 16 inputs and 8 outputs.
If the relay model is F650***F2*** the unit will incorporate 1 board (F) with:
8 inputs + 4 tripping coil supervision circuits and
6 outputs + 2 outputs with tripping current supervision circuits
If the relay model is F650***F*G1** the unit will incorporate a second board (G) with 16 inputs and 8 outputs
NOTE: Both in the outputs menu as in the rest of menus available in “Actual”, the user can view several screens at the
same time to facilitate analysis.
These screens are available for all boards incorporated in the relay model, which can be F, G, H, and/or J.
This screen shows the activated or deactivated status of those variables used internally to operate a contact output.
Signals shown on this screen are configured in the Outputs screen inside the Setpoint > Relay Configuration menu,
either directly by selecting the signals provided by the relay, or selecting a signal provided by the logic configured at
Setpoint > Logic Configuration.
These logic signals (Contact Output Operates), when being transformed by the outputs logic configured at Setpoint >
Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board X become Contact Output signals. This output logic can be POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE, pulse, latched, etc.
The last LED in this screen, labeled as “Board Status”, indicates the general board status.
This output reset Command will only be effective if the “latch” option has been selected for the “Output Type” setting on
the I/O board, thus when the contact output has been configured to emulate function 86 (latching relay).
Configuration for the contact output reset signal is set at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs > Contact Output
Reset.
For all I/O board screens described above, the last LED provides this same information individually.
6 Save: It allows saving the Snapshot events information obtained in the relay in a CSV format file.
Print: It allows printing the viewed data.
View data: It allows to view the information contained in the selected event, such as the event number, date and time,
cause of the event, as well as the voltage and current values in the moment of the event (see ).
There is a “Select” option, which is used for selecting the events that are required to appear when the screen information is
printed or saved.
The Actual > Records > Waveform Capture screen displays a list of all oscillography records available in the relay. The
F650 stores oscillography records from 1 to 999; this is the index of the obtained oscillography record. This screen allows
selecting the records to be saved among all records available. Download of these records will be done through the selected
connection in the “Communication > Computer” menu, either serial mode or Ethernet.
6 then be prepared to view oscillography and digital records using the options in available menus (Waveforms and Digital
Flags). Otherwise, it will be required to select the Create New Template option, where the program will help create a new
template. Nevertheless, there is a specific instruction manual for GE-OSC software use.
When selecting the Actual > Records > Fault Report menu, EnerVista F650 Setup will show the following screen,
indicating the fault reports available in the relay.
When selecting one of the records, a new screen will detail the following information:
• Date
• Time 6
• Pre-fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault type
• Distance to the fault
The operation of this screen is similar to that of the previous oscillography screen, being in this case the number of fault
reports a fixed number (10), instead of variable and setting-selected like as in the previous case.
Once a fault report is selected, its heading description will be displayed, showing pre-fault information, fault information and
the distance to the fault. This file can be downloaded to the computer in a CSV format file.
Fault report file retrieval can be performed via serial or Ethernet communications. It must be taken into account that any
settings change in the fault report will produce the removal of all the information stored up to that moment.
The access menu is Actual > Records > Data Logger. Once open, this menu will show a screen containing the
information monitored by the relay according to the settings adjusted at “Setpoint > Product Setup > Data Logger”, where
the user can select which analog channels will be recorded, as well as the sampling rate.
It must be taken into account that any settings change in the data logger will produce the removal of all the information
stored up to that moment.
The data logger screen diagram shows the time during which the displayed values have been obtained.
The upper part of the window shows the time when the oldest sample was taken, as well as the time when the most recent
value was taken.
This screen offers the possibility of storing the data logger record obtained for a further analysis, in COMTRADE format.
Data Logger file retrieval can be performed only via Ethernet communications.
NOTE: Only Administrators have access to the User Management dialog box.
Following is a list of all of the User Rights Options available to be granted to users, and their functions.
7.2CHANGING PASSWORDS
Users will be prompted to change their password after the first successful log in or through clicking Security
from the toolbar, and choose Change Password.
7.3ENABLING SECURITY
EnerVista UR Setup Security Control is disabled by default. Users don't have to log in through user name and password
after installation and are granted access as Administrator.
Security Control can be enabled through Security from the tool bar when logged on as an Administrator. Click on User
Management and a dialog box will show up.
WARNING
BEFORE PERFORMING THE UPDATE PROCEDURE CHECK THAT BOOT AND FIRMWARE VERSION MATCH
FIRMWARE VERSION 1.80 WORKS WITH BOOT VERSION 2.35
The operative system and firmware versions can be seen in the relay main screen: After the text “F650”, appears the relay
firmware version (1.20 in the example), and between parenthesis the boot program version (2.20 in the example), followed
by “ GENERAL ELECTRIC”, the relay model and the default front RS232 port communication parameters.
NOTE
The end of this section includes a STEP LIST SUMMARY that will allow the user to control the updating process. It is
necessary to read the whole document before accomplishing the F650 UPDATE PROCEDURE related in these pages.
Notice that boot program and firmware upgrades will erase all the data contained in the relay, thus it is advisable to save
all the data, oscillography, events, settings and configuration files previously.
Backward compatibility of PLC projects, settings and configuration files is not assured for versions older than 1.13.
NOTE
The update of the boot program (BOOTCODE) will be performed, obligatorily, by crossed copper cable connected to the
PC. It is not necessary to change the internal switch from fiber to RJ45, because the upgrade it is made at 10Mb/s and
for that reason there is not conflict between copper/fiber optic.
This does not apply to the firmware upgrade, which can be done either via Ethernet Fiber connection, or through the
RJ45 cable connection.
Before proceeding with the update process, the following points should be taken into account:
Type of Ethernet connection:
If the relay is connected through a hub or to a switch, a direct 10/100 Base TX Ethernet cable should be used, or with its
fiber optic if the relay is of 100FX Ethernet. Otherwise, a direct connection from the PC to the relay (back-to-back) requires
a crossover 10/100 Base T cable.
It is highly recommended to use a crossover cable to do the update process and do a direct connection from the PC to the
relay instead of being connected through a hub or switch.
Relay IP address:
It is necessary to assign a valid IP address to the relay in the Ethernet parameters via HMI in the “Product Setup >
Communication > Ethernet > Ethernet 1” menu or via EnerVista F650 Setup in “Setpoint > Product Setup>Communication
Settings > Network (Ethernet) 1” as shown in Table 8–1: .
8 IP Address Oct3
IP Address Oct4
37
240
[0 : 255]
[0 : 255]
Netmask Oct1 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct2 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct3 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Gateway IP Oct1 192 [0 : 255]
Gateway IP Oct2 168 [0 : 255]
Gateway IP Oct3 37 [0 : 255]
Gateway IP Oct4 10 [0 : 255]
In the case of relay that has updated previously its Bootcode (Sections 2), the IP address already has been assigned in the
previous process (see figure 8-14).
In both cases, it is necessary to check that there is no other equipment connected with the same IP address in the same
net, to avoid collision.
In case of a back-to-back connection from a PC to the relay (through a crossover Ethernet cable), the IP address of the
relay needs to be compatible with the TCP/IP configuration of the computer.
For example, if the relay settings are:
IP address: 192.168.37.240,
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 and
Gateway: 192.168.37.10.
The computer settings have to follow the model:
IP address: 192.168.37.XXX
Netmask: 255.255.255.0 and
Gateway: 192.168.37.10 (if desired).
XXX is a number between 0 and 255 that is not assigned to any other device to avoid collisions.
If there are not TCP/IP settings according to this model in the computer, it should be added (in order to communicate with
the relay) following these steps:
Go to the Control Panel of the computer and select the Network option (the name of this option may depend on the PC
operative system).
In IP address tab, select Advanced... () and add a new address in the PC that corresponds to the same LAN that the relay
has (in the example bellow 192.168.37.54).
Windows allows Multihosting, so it permits having as many directions as desired. It is necessary to turn off and on the
computer to activate the new address that has been assigned to the PC.
For upgrading the operative system, it is required to connect an RS232 cable to the front of the relay, and an Ethernet cable
to the rear port (COM3). The serial communication parameters will be the ones selected in the Communications >
Computer menu, where the COMX port (the port to be used in the upgrade) must be selected. As regards Ethernet
communication, if the upgrade is to be performed through a hub or switch, it is required to connect the relay to the hub or
switch through a direct 10/100 base T cable.
If the connection is made directly from the PC to the relay it is necessary to use a 10/100 Base T crossover cable. This last
connection will be obligatory for relays with Fiber Optic Ethernet, although it will not be necessary to change the internal
switch. During the upgrade, the system will show the following message indicating the procedure to be followed.
NOTE
To obtain more information about the Relay network configuration, please refer to section “Communication Parameters”
After accepting to proceed, a window will open up for selecting a temporary IP Address for the boot update. It is advisable
to set the IP Address that is going to be used lately in the relay for Ethernet connection.
After entering the temporary IP address, a window will open up for selecting the appropriate file from the GE Multilin web
site or Product CD.
Once the appropriate boot program file has been selected, the program will proceed to load and update the relay’s boot
8 memory.
After the boot memory loading, the program shows a message requiring turning off and back on the relay while the
progress bar is in course.
Figure 8–10: SWITCH THE RELAY OFF AND ON TO START THE BOOT PROCEDURE
It is important to turn the Relay off and on again during the time shown by the progress bar; in case this time expires, the
program will offer the option to continue with the process or to postpone, verify the correct RS232 connections and try again
later. Notice that the serial port used in the boot update procedure is the one selected in the “Communication>computer“
menu.
If the serial communication between EnerVista F650 Setup and the relay has been successful the program shows a
message to select to update the current version to the new one.
At this moment, selecting “YES” in the “Update current version?” option will start, beginning with the relay flash memory
deletion, so at this point all the information stored in the relay will be lost.
Until now, no important change has been made to the relay, the boot memory updating process has simply been prepared.
The process of flash memory erasing and boot memory file loading can take some minutes, during which a progress bar is
displayed.
Once the memory has been erased and the files updated in the relay, the parameters for the Ethernet communications
parameters must be assigned (Figure 8–14:). The requested values are the IP address and the gateway
These values should match the LAN structure in which the relay will be connected.
The gateway must be the one used in the LAN structure connecting the relay. The relay IP address should have the first
three octets corresponding with the Gateway and the last octet must be a free IP address reserved to the relay to avoid
possible collisions with other devices.
After assigning the Ethernet parameters, the update of the boot memory program has been completed successfully .
After boot memory update, the equipment firmware must also be updated (Section 8.3).
Once the communication with the relay through Ethernet connection has been verified1, enter the EnerVista F650 Setup
program, select Communication and the Upgrade Firmware Version option.
At this point, proceeding with the update will erase all the data stored in the equipment, including the calibration settings in
firmware version previous to 1.50. Therefore, it is necessary to save all settings to a file before following with the process.
After accepting to proceed, a window will open up for the update parameter for the F650 firmware update process. In
firmware version previous to 1.70 the EnerVista F650 Setup program asked for the IP address of the relay to be updated
and its serial number. In versions 1.70 and higher it is also necessary to enter the ordering code for the relay. See figure
below:
This change is due to the multilingual implementation in F650 devices. See ordering code section in product description
chapter in this manual (section 2.3. )
Once the upgrade parameters have been entered, relay IP address, serial number and ordering code, press the “Upgrade
Firmware” button. When communication has been established, the program will show a message requesting to turn off
and back on the relay to continue with the upgrade process.
Once the relay has been turned off and on again, a new screen allows selecting the folder that contains the firmware
update files (“update.txt” file must be located in this folder). This Update.txt file is located in the folder where the desired
firmware upgrade files are. This firmware update files can be found in the GE Multilin web site.
If the files are downloaded from the web, they are compressed in a zip file. It should be decompressed in a temporary
directory from which the update.txt file will be selected.
Once the Update.txt file is selected, the “Upgrade Firmware” button will be enabled. Press this button to initiate the relay
firmware upgrade process. A voltage range selection window will appear, this voltage range is connected to the serial
number of the relay. The EnerVista F650 Setup program automatically pre-selects the appropriate voltage range for the
unit. If the voltage range is not selected correctly the error in voltage measurements will be 20 %.
During the process, the program displays the files that are being updated. When the file transfer is finished, a message
appears noticing that it is necessary to wait sometime before resetting the unit, in order to start working with the new
firmware version in the relay. When the whole process has finished a message will be displayed asking to reboot the F650.
At this point, the firmware upgrade procedure is finished and the relay ready to be powered down and back up to check that
the firmware has been upgraded properly.
When upgrading the firmware the entire settings and relay configuration are reset to factory default value.
Once the equipment has been properly checked, the F650 is ready to be used.
Remember that calibration settings and configuration must be loaded to the relay. To recover the relay calibration:
Go to EnerVista F650 Setup main menu:
8 Communication > Calibration > Set calibration Settings to store in the relay the calibration settings if necessary.
File > Config file (*.650) Converter to convert the setting and configuration file *.650 for the relay (if is was in a previous
version format) to the new version (see section in human interfaces in this manual)
File > Send info to relay to send the new settings and configuration file to the unit.
Notice that boot program and firmware upgrade will erase all the data contained in the relay, thus it is advisable
to save all the data, oscillography, events, settings and configuration files previously.
(*) The boot code upgrade must be performed using a crossed copper cable (RJ45) connected to the PC. It is not
necessary to modify the internal fiber/cable switch, as the upgrade is carried out at 10 Mb/s, and thus there is not cable/
fiber conflict.
This fact does not apply to the firmware upgrade, which can be performed either with the Ethernet fiber
connection, or with the cable connection.
Display information:
Firmware version
GENERAL ELECTRIC
F650XXXXXXXXX Model
19200N81 MODBUS:254
9.3ISOLATION TESTS
During all tests, the screw located on the rear of the relay must be grounded.
For verifying isolation, independent groups will be created, and voltage will be applied as follows:
2200 RMS volts will be applied progressively among all terminals in a group, short-circuited between them and the
case, during one second.
2200 RMS volts will be applied progressively between groups, during one second.
WARNING: No communication circuit shall be tested for isolation.
Groups to be created will depend on the type of modules included in F650, selectable according to the model.
The following table shows the different groups depending on the module type:
9.4INDICATORS
Feed the relay and verify that when commanding a LED reset operation, all LED indicators light up and they are turned off
when pressing the ESC key for more than 3 seconds.
HI/HIR
110-250 Vdc 88 Vdc 300 Vdc
120-230 Vac 96 Vac 250 Vac
LO/LOR
24-48 Vdc 20 Vdc 57.6 Vdc
9.6COMMUNICATIONS
Verify that available communication ports allow communication with the relay.
Ports to be checked are as follows:
Front:RS232
Rear:2 x RS485, 2 x Fiber Optic - Serial, 2 x Fiber Optic - Ethernet, 1 x RJ45 - Ethernet.
A computer with EnerVista F650 Setup software and an appropriate connector must be used.
9.7VERIFICATION OF MEASURE
Set the relay as follows
GENERAL SETTINGS
NAME VALUE UNITS RANGE
PHASE CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
GROUND CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
STV GROUND CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
PHASE VT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
PHASE VT CONNECTION WYE N/A WYE – DELTA
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 100 V 0.1 1-250 V
NOMINAL FREQUENCY 50 Hz 1 Hz 50-60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION ABC N/A ABC – ACB
FREQUENCY REFERENCE VI N/A VI-VII-VIII
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE VX N/A VX – VN
NOTE:
ALL ANGLES INDICATED ARE DELAY ANGLES
ALL VALUES OBTAINED IN THIS TEST MUST BE THE ONES CORRESPONDING TO THE DFT
9.7.1 VOLTAGES
Verify that the relay measures the values with an error of +/-1 % of the applied value plus 0,1% of full scale (275V).
With the indicated voltage and current values, verify that the power measure corresponds to theoretical values indicated in
the following table:
Maximum admissible error is +/-1% of the test value for P and Q, and 0.02 for cosϕ.
9.7.4 FREQUENCY
Results:
During this test, the user will determine the activation/deactivation points for every input in the relay for the set voltage value
of 30 Volts.
Verify that the error does not exceed +/- 10% (+10% on activation, -10% on deactivation)
Default board settings for the input test can be modified in EnerVista F650 Setup software in:
Settings>Inputs/Outputs>Contact I/O>Board X
X, will be substituted by the corresponding board:
F for board in first slot
G for board in second slot
H for board in first slot of CIO module
J for board in second slot of CIO module
Test settings for mixed board (type 1:16 inputs and 8 outputs) :
The inputs test is completed by groups of 8 inputs, as this type of board has 2 groups of 8 inputs with the same common.
For the first 8 inputs, the voltage threshold setting is determined by Voltage Threshold A. For the next 8 inputs, the setting
is Voltage Threshold B. Inputs (or contact converters, CC1 – CC16) must also be set to POSITIVE.
Test settings for mixed board (type 2: 8 digital inputs, 4 blocks for supervision and 8 outputs) :
Supervision inputs will be tested as normal inputs, revising the voltage level that will be 19 Volts.
Coil 1:
Apply 19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F1-F2) and 52/b (terminals F3-F4)”Coil 1” circuit supervision inputs and verify that
they are activated.
Apply -19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F1-F2) and 52/b (terminals F3-F4)”Coil 1” circuit supervision inputs and verify
that they are activated.
Remove voltage from both inputs and verify that it takes them 500 ms to change state (deactivate).
Coil 2:
Apply 19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F15-F16) and 52/b (terminals F17-F18)”Coil 2” circuit supervision inputs and
verify that they are activated.
Apply -19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F15-F16) and 52/b (terminals F17-F18)”Coil 2” circuit supervision inputs and
verify that they are activated.
Remove voltage from both inputs and verify that it takes them 500 ms to change state (deactivate).
Make circulate a current of 200 mA through the contact in series with the sensing terminal.
Send an opening command and verify that the contact does not open.
Interrupt current and check than the contact is released.
200
9
I
PHASE CONNECTIONS
Current
IA B1-B2
IB B3-B4
IC B5-B6
IG B9-B10
ISG B11-B12
Voltage
VI A5-A6
VII A7-A8
VIII A9-A10
VX A11-A12
Activate only protection elements 50PH and 67P and set the relay as follows:
IB 2A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
IC 2A 0º VII 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
Activate only protection elements 50N and 67N and set the relay as follows:
67N Settings 50N Settings
Function ENABLED Function ENABLED
MTA -45 Deg Input PHASOR (DFT)
9 Direction FORWARD Pickup Level 0.50 A
Polarization VO Trip Delay 0.30
Block Logic PERMISSION Reset Delay 0.00
Pol V Threshold 10 V
IB 0A 0º VII 0V 0º
IC 0A 0º VIII 0V 0º
Activate only protection elements 50G and 67G and set the relay as follows:
VIII 0V 0º
Activate only protection elements 50SG and 67SG and set the relay as follows:
VIII 0V 0º
Set the relay to trip for the protection element being tested. Configure any of the outputs to be activated only by the
protection element being tested.
Set the relay as follows:
PHASE UV (27P)
Function ENABLED
Mode PHASE-GROUND
Pickup Level 50 V
Curve DEFINITE TIME
Delay 2.00 sec
Minimum Voltage 30 V
Logic ANY PHASE
Supervised by 52 DISABLED
Apply voltage as indicated on the table over the undervoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Decrease voltage level gradually and verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
AUXILIARY UV (27X)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 50 V
Curve DEFINITE TIME
Delay 2.00 sec
Apply voltage as indicated on the table over the undervoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Decrease voltage level gradually and verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
9.14OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47) 9.14.1 59P ELEMENT
Set the relay to trip for the protection element being tested. Configure any of the outputs to be activated only by the
protection element being tested.
Set the relay as follows:
PHSE OV (59P)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 120 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
Logic ANY PHASE
Apply voltage as indicated on the table under the overvoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
ELEMENT PHASE PICKUP LEVEL TRIP DELAY APPLIED TRIPPING TIME (S)
(VOLTS) (SECONDS) VOLTAGE (V)
THEORETICA ADMISSIBLE
L
59P VII 120 2 114 NO TRIP NA
132 2 [1.9–2.1 ]
132 2 [1.9 – 2.1]
GENERAL SETTINGS
Auxiliary Voltage VX
AUXILIARY OV (59P)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 120 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
Logic ANY PHASE
Apply voltage as indicated on the table under the overvoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
GENERAL SETTINGS
Auxiliary Voltage VN
Apply voltage as indicated on the table under the overvoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
ELEMENTS INPUT PICKUP LEVEL TRIP DELAY APPLIED TRIPPING TIME (S)
(VOLTS) (SECONDS) VOLTAGE (V) THEORETICA ADMISSIBLE
L
59NH/59NL VX 120 2 114 NO TRIP NA
132 2 [1.9–2.1 ]
132 2 [1.9 – 2.1]
This element can also be tested by applying only phase voltages. For this purpose, it is necessary to set Auxiliary Voltage =
VX. In this condition, Vn voltage is calculated as a sum of the phase voltages.
Apply voltage as indicated on the table under the overvoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
NOTE: All angles mentioned on the tables are delay angles, where a balanced ABC system would be composed by:
VI 65 0º
VII 65 120º
VIII 65 240º
GENERAL SETTINGS
Nominal Frequency 50 Hz
ELEMENT SETTINGS
FREQUENCY (81) 81U 81O
Function ENABLED ENABLED
Pickup Level 47.50 Hz 52.50 Hz
Trip Delay 2.00 sec 2.00 sec
Reset Delay 0.00 sec 0.00 sec
Minimum Voltage 30 V 30 V
Apply voltage as indicated on the table, modifying frequency from the maximum threshold (48 Hz) to the minimum (46 Hz)
for 81U, and from the minimum (52 Hz) to the maximum (54 Hz) for 81O, in steps of 10 mHz.
Verify that the relay trips at the set frequency in the corresponding element with an error of 3% ó +/-50 mHz.
Apply a voltage that is lower than the “Minimum Voltage” setting, with a frequency under (81U) or over (81O) the setting,
and verify that the relay does not trip.
ELEMENTS PHASE PICKUP LEVEL TRIP DELAY APPLIED FREQUENCY TRIPPING TIME (S)
(HZ) (SECONDS) VOLTAGE (V) THRESHOLDS
THEORETICA ADMISSIBLE
L
81U VII 47.5 2 80 48 Hz No trip NA
46 Hz 2 [1.9 –2.2]
25 46 Hz No trip NA
81 O VII 52.5 2 80 52 Hz No trip NA
54 Hz 2 [1.9 –2.2]
25 54 Hz No trip NA
9.16RECLOSER (79)
Set protection element 79 as follows:
RECLOSER
Function ENABLED
Max Number Shots 4
Dead Time 1 2.10 sec
Dead Time 2 4.10 sec
Dead Time 3 6.10 sec
Dead Time 4 8.10 sec
Reclaim Time 3.00 sec
Cond. Permission ENABLED
Hold Time 7.00 sec
Reset Time 5.00 sec
50PH SETTINGS
Function ENABLED
Input RMS
Pickup Level 3A
Trip Delay 0.00 s
Reset Delay 0.00 s
Connect a latching relay simulating the breaker managed by the F650 unit.
Once the relay is set, close the breaker and wait for 5 seconds.
After this time, the recloser is ready to initiate the reclosing cycle.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 2.1 seconds.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 4.1 seconds.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 6.1 seconds.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 8.1 seconds.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the recloser passes to Lockout.
Verify the correct operation of programmed outputs
Tripping times must be within the following values:
Reclosing Cycle
9 Nº shot
1
Theoretical time
2.1 sec
Admissible time
[1.8 – 2.3]
2 4.1 sec [3.8 – 4.3]
3 6.1 sec [5.8 – 6.3]
4 8.1 sec [7.8 – 8.3]
BLOCK
Activate the block input and verify that the recloser is in BLOCK status.
Close the breaker and wait for 5 seconds.
Command a trip and verify that the breaker opens but there is no reclose.
RATED CURRENT (A) APPLIED CURRENT (A) TIMES DE SET TAP OPERATION TIME (S)
4.0 2 48.5 - 53.6
5 10.0 5 7.06 - 7.80
20.0 10 1.77 - 1.95
After each measure, the thermal element must be reset to zero in order to start the next test at a zero thermal status
condition.
Repeat the test selecting a time constant τ1 of 60 minutes. Verify that the operation time is within the range described on
the following table:
RATED CURRENT (A) APPLIED CURRENT (A) TIMES DE SET TAP OPERATION TIME (S)
4.0 2 960 - 1072
5 10.0 5 141 - 156
20.0 10 35.4 - 39
After each measure, the thermal element must be reset to zero in order to start the next test at a zero thermal status
condition.
This procedure describes the connection between any Laptop and some F650 relay using the EnerVista 650 SETUP
program
For any one of these connections check first the communication parameters as follows:
In the front of F650 relay and pressing the ESC key display the Main Settings screen.
Move clockwise the rotating knob to choose Change Settings and press down the rotating knob.
Choose Comm Settings and press down the rotating knob.
Choose Network 0 and press down the rotating knob. It will be displayed IP Address OCT 1 and set it according to the
following table:
SEQUENCE
ACTION
----
SETTING
IP Address OCT 1
ACTION
Set to 192 with rotating knob and press it down
10
Move rotating knob clockwise IP Address OCT 2 Set to 168 with rotating knob and press it down
Move rotating knob clockwise IP Address OCT 3 Set to 37 with rotating knob and press it down
Move rotating knob clockwise IP Address OCT 4 Set to 125 with rotating knob and press it down
Move rotating knob clockwise Netmask OCT 1 Set to 255 with rotating knob and press it down
Move rotating knob clockwise Netmask OCT 2 Set to 255 with rotating knob and press it down
Move rotating knob clockwise Netmask OCT 3 Set to 255 with rotating knob and press it down
Move rotating knob clockwise Netmask OCT 4 Set to 0 with rotating knob and press it down
Move rotating knob clockwise Netway IP OCT 1 Leave default setting without any change
Move rotating knob clockwise Netway IP OCT 2 Leave default setting without any change
Move rotating knob clockwise Netway IP OCT 3 Leave default setting without any change
Move rotating knob clockwise Netway IP OCT 4 Leave default setting without any change
Move rotating knob clockwise Press INTRO Press down the rotating knob to validate settings
10
Once the relay has been connected set protection functions and outputs according to the following steps:
Open EnerVista 650 SETUP program and under:
SETPOINT ⇓ SYSTEM SETUP ⇒ ⇓ GENERAL SETTINGS
NAME VALUE
Phase CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Ground CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Phase VT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Phase VT Connection Wye
Nominal Voltage 100.0 (default)
Nominal Frequency 50
Phase Rotation ABC
Frequency Reference VI (default)
Auxiliary Voltage VX (default)
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ PROTECTION ELEMENTS ⇒ ⇓ PHASE CURRENT ⇒ ⇓ PHASE TOC HIGH ⇒ PHASE TOC HIGH 1
NAME VALUE
Function Enabled
Input Phasor DFT
Pickup Level 5.0 A
Curve IEC Curve A
TD Multiplier 0.1
Reset Instantaneous
Voltage Restraint Disabled
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ CONTROL ELEMENTS ⇒ INPUTS/OUTPUTS ⇒ BOARD F
NAME VALUE
Output Logic_00_00 Positive
Output Type_00_00 Latch
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ OUTPUTS
SELECT NAME SOURCE OR
Contact Output Operate 00 (Board F) C Output Oper_00_00 PRESS FOR LOGIC £
Phase TOC A Op
Phase TOC B Op
Phase TOC C Op
Contact Output Reset 00 (Board F) C Output Reset_00_00 Operation bit 000
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ LEDS 10
SELECT NAME SOURCE
10.1.4 TEST
Apply 7.5 A in phase A (terminals B1-B2) until contact 00 on Board F operates (terminals F19-F21 should be and remain
closed), and LED 5 should be lit. Check that operating time is in the order of 1.7 seconds.
Remove current from terminals B1-B2
Press pushbutton F1 and check that contact 00 on Board F has been open.
Check that LED 5 in the front of the relay has been turned off.
Repeat the process for phase B (terminals B3-B4) and for phase C (terminals B5-B6)
Under Actual ⇓ Waveform Capture menu retrieve the last oscillography recording stored, open it using GE_OSC program
and check that the two digital signals as well as the current signal were kept.
10
The purpose of this exercise is to introduce the F650 User about the way to set a protection scheme including:
Trip operation of a phase time overcurrent protection.
Two reclosing shots with successful fault clearing.
Synchronism check action to verify two ends voltage conditions previous to perform each reclosing action.
This procedure is described in Example Nº 1. Therefore check the actual PC communication status to assure a fast and
reliable communication with F650 relay.
This procedure is fully described in paragraph 13.3 (see Example Nº 1). Therefore it is not necessary to explain it here
again except about the small modifications required for the actual exercise, as well the additional settings not used until
now (i.e. recloser and synchrocheck).
Therefore, by having the F650 set like in the previous exercise (paragraph 13), the new settings and changes to be done in
the relay to work in a protection-reclosing scheme are:
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ PROTECTION ⇒ ELEMENTS BREAKER ⇒ ⇓ BREAKER SETTINGS
NAME VALUE
Number of Switchgear 1
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ CONTROL ELEMENTS ⇒ INPUTS/OUTPUTS ⇒ BOARD F
NAME VALUE
Output Logic_00_00 Positive
Voltage Threshold B_00 80V
Debounce Time B_00 10 ms
Input Type_00_00 (CC1) Positive
Delay Input Time_00_00 (CC1) 0 ms
Output Type_00_00 Normal
Pulse Output Time_00_00 500 ms
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ PROTECTION ELEMENTS
SELECT SOURCE OR
AR Initiate PRESS FOR LOGIC £
Phase TOC A Op
Phase TOC B Op
Phase TOC C Op
AR Conds Input Synch Close Perm
10
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ PROTECTION ELEMENTS ⇒ ⇓ OTHER FUNCTIONS⇒ ⇓ RECLOSER
NAME VALUE
Function Enabled
Max. Number of shots 2
Dead Time 1 2.0s
Dead Time 2 4.0s
Dead Time 3 ---
Dead Time 4 ---
Reclaim Time 0.05s
Condition Permission Enabled
Hold Time 0.1s
Reset Time 1.9s
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ PROTECTION ELEMENTS ⇒ ⇓ OTHER FUNCTIONS ⇒ ⇓ SYNCHROCHECK
The synchrocheck function and its permission to close is a condition in the present exercise to allow the recloser to give the
different programmed shots. Should not this condition be required these settings are non relevant, but if does like in the
present case the synchrocheck function must be set as follows
NAME VALUE
Function Enabled
Dead Bus Level 10V
Live Bus Level 50V
Dead Line Level 10V
Live Line Level 50V
Max. Volt Difference 10
Max. Angle Difference 10º
Max. Freq. Difference 20mHz
Breaker Closing Time 0.07s
DL-DB Function Disabled
LL-DB Function Disabled
DL-LB Function Disabled
The F650 trip contact over-travel is the time the contact remains closed for some definite time to assure the tripping action
of the breaker, specially in CB’s with large tripping times (bulk or other CB’s). This time delay has been set in group
SETPOINT ⇓ CONTROL ELEMENTS ⇒ INPUTS/OUTPUTS ⇒ BOARD F
To test the reclosing scheme one current and two voltages signals equipment with phase and frequency shifting capability
must be used. The current source must be switched OFF and ON in the time ranges described in the scheme
Example Nº 2
F650 Tripping and Reclosing Scheme
2 Shots followed by Permanent Fault
Recloser to Lockout
Overcurrent Condition
CB Open-52/b closed
CB Open-52/b closed
CB Open-52/b closed
Contact Overtravel
(Definitive Trip)
51 Trip
51 Trip
51 Trip
0.15s
0.15s
Figure 10–1:
10
This simple operation describes how to program and set an operation command on the F650 relay. In the present case the
operation is:
To configure some F650 output contact to be operated since the front of the relay.
To set some LED to show the operation of the output contact (while being closed).
To close a F650 output contact using a front key pushbutton.
To reset the output contact and LED using another front key pushbutton.
10.3.2 PROCEDURE
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ CONTROL ELEMENTS ⇒ INPUTS/OUTPUTS ⇒ BOARD F
NAME VALUE
Output Logic_00_00 Positive
Output Type_00_00 Latch
Pulse Output Time 10000ms *
* This setting is non-relevant since it applies only when “pulse” type is chosen
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ OUTPUTS
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ LEDS
10
Under
SETPOINT ⇓ RELAY CONFIGURATION ⇒ OPERATIONS
Select £ Operation 0
Command Text Close C_Output_00_00
Interlock Type None
Interlocks ---
Final State Type None
Final States ---
Frontal Key F2
Contact Input None
Virtual Output None
Time Out 500 (default)
MMI ---
Com1 ---
Com 2 ---
ETH-Master 1 ---
ETH Master 2 ---
ETH Master 3 ---
ETH Mastef 4 ---
Select £ Operation 1
Command Text Reset C_Output_00_00
Interlock Type None
Interlocks ---
Final State Type None
Final States ---
Frontal Key F1
Contact Input None
Virtual Output None
Time Out 500 (default)
MMI ---
Com1 ---
Com 2 ---
ETH-Master 1 ---
ETH Master 2 ---
ETH Master 3 ---
ETH Mastef 4 ---
10
10
Q7 How many different communication Ethernet sessions can be opened through the LAN port?
A7 ModBus TCP/IP:4 sockets
DNP TCP/IP:3 sessions (from version 1.72 on)
Q8 Does it support peer-to-peer horizontal communications? Is this going to interface with UR relays?
A8 It is not included in the present release.
Q9 May I use the cooper 10/100 BaseTX connection included in the basic model with all protocols?
A9 Yes, it may be used with all protocols. In noisy substation environments and/or long distances, it is recommended to
use fiber optic options due to much better EMC performance and immunity. For fiber optic models, it is necessary to
adjust an internal jumper to use the copper port.
Q15: How do I connect with fiber 10-BASE-FL UR relays with 100-BASE-FX F650 relays?
A15: Take into account that an UR is never connected directly to a F650 (neither two UR nor two F650 with each other)
but they are always connected through a hub or switch. The hub or switch where the URs are connected must be
10-BASE-FL and the hub or switch for the F650 must be 100-BASE-FX.
Q16: How do I connect with cable 10_BASE-T UR relays with 10/100-BASE-TX F650 relays?
A16: The answer to this question is as described before but also in this case there is an advantage added, because the
hub 10-BASE-TX port is able to understand a 10-BASE-T port. This means that a hub 10-BASE-T port may be
connected to an UR or a F650, and a hub 10/100-BASE-TX port may be connected either to an UR or F650.
Q17: What happens with fiber optic connectors compatibility, because the hub that I have has a different
connector to the one of the F650, although both are 100-BASE-FX?
A17: Just buy fiber cables with the appropriate male connectors. For the UR and F650 side we need the same
connectors, ST type, for the hub side, the correspondent ones. And in what concerns to the fiber type, it is used the
same for 10 as for 100, it is the 50/125 or 62.5/125 multimode, this last one allows longer distances.
Q19: Why do we have 10/100 compatibility for cable but not for fiber?
A19: The cable has some advantages that the fiber does not have, and it is that the signal attenuation in short and
medium distances, is worthless and this is truth for low and high frequency signals. By the contrary, the light in one
fiber optic is highly attenuated, being much worse in case of high frequencies than in the low ones. The 10-BASE-FL
fiber transmission is performed in a wavelength of 850nm, what allows a less expensive electronic than the 1300 nm
used in 100-BASE-FX fiber transmission. Using, in both cases, the same glass multimode fiber type, the attenuation
to 1300 nm is lower than the 850 nm ones, this way the greater attenuation of the 100 Mbits is compensated. There
is another fiber standard, the 100-BASE-SX, which uses 850 nm to 100 Mbits, being compatible with the 10-BASE-
FL one, although it sacrifices the maximum distance to 300 m. Nowadays, this standard has not had success among
Ethernet equipment manufacturers and suppliers.
11.2PROTECTION
Q1 Does the F650 support IRIG-B signals? Which type and accuracy? How many units may be connected to the
same source?
11
A1 Yes, the F650 includes an IRIG-B input for all models, including the basic ones.
It uses DC level format B. Formats used are B0000, B0002 and B0003.
Actual accuracy is 1 millisecond. Internal sampling rate allows true 1 ms accuracy time tagging.
The input burden is very low. The maximum number of units that may be connected to a generator depends on its
output driving capability. Up to 60 units have been successfully connected with equipments commonly used in the
market.
Q2 Does the equipment work with dry inputs in both AC and DC?
A2 The equipment works only with DC inputs.
Inputs should be driven with externally generated DC current. No special 48 Vdc or other outputs are included in the
equipment to drive these inputs; therefore, contacts connected to the equipment should be connected to a DC
source.
Q3 Is this equipment valid for Petersen coil grounded systems and ungrounded systems?
A3 The 5th current input is a very sensitive unit that measures from 5 mA up to 1.5 A, that is used for these systems.
The present release includes 67SG (sensitive ground) as well as 67IG (isolated ground for ungrounded systems).
Petersen Coil 67PC unit will be included in future releases that will only need firmware update.
Q4 Is oscillography programmable?
A4 Yes, the sampling rate is programmable (4, 8, 16, 32 or 64 samples per input). The depth will depend on the
sampling rate.
Q6 In my installation, several digital inputs become active when I energize the transformer. How can I reduce
sensitivity?
A6 By selecting debounce time and/or voltage threshold, the relay may adapt its sensitivity to different applications.
Please select the maximum voltage threshold and debounce time (recommended 15 ms) to minimize AC coupling
effects.
11 Q1 What is the difference between Get/Send info from/to relay and Upload/Download info files to/from relay?
A1 Get/Send are used for settings and configuration storage that although both are in a unique file, are sent separately
in two times. Upload/Download are used for project or PLC files group storage. These files are the
setting_configuration file source. To operate, the F650 does not need the source files; the Upload/Download tool is
destined to serve as historic file.
Q2 Could I program interlocks?
A2 Yes, via ENERVISTA F650 SETUP interlocks may be programmed from very simple to advanced schemes.
Q6 Is it possible to have a remote HMI installed in the front of the panel with the rest of the relay in the rear
side?
A6 Not in the present version.
Q10 Why do appear strange texts on the display when switching on the relay?
A10 You will have pressed any button and the HMI has entered in a test mode.
The display messages are updated after a few minutes, once the relay has completed the starting sequence.
11.4RELAY CONFIGURATION
Q1 Does the "Service" contact on the Power Supply board cover all possible failures or do I have to create an
output on the I/O board that includes all the internal errors I can access in the logic?
11
A1 The power supply ready contact only monitor hardware failures in the power supply, to monitor the internal error of
the unit it is necessary to configure a virtual output to and the assign it to the device desired (contact output, LED,
etc.).
Q2 I set an output contact as "Latched". If I do not set a "reset" condition, will it reset from the "ESC" key?
A2 No, you have to configure the contact output reset signal (in Settings>Relay Configuration>Outputs). The ESC
key only reset the LED indicators.
11
12 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
F650 units have been designed and verified using the most advanced and reliable equipment. Mounting and
testing automation ensure a high consistency of the final product. Before sending a unit back to the factory, we
strongly recommend you follow the recommendations below. Even if it will not always solve the problem, at least
they will help define it better for a quicker repair.
If you need to send a unit back to the factory for repair, please use the appropriate RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORISATION
process, and follow the shipping instructions provided by our Service Department, especially in the case of international
shipments. This will lead to a faster and efficient solution of your problem. 12
CATEGORY SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION
Protection The relay does not trip -Function not permitted - Set the function permission to
ENABLED
-Incorrect baudrate, port, address, etc. -Test other ports, other baudrates, etc.
Make sure that the communication
parameters in the computer match the
ones in the relay.
General After Updating the Check that the bootware version If there is an incompatibility between
firmware the relay match with the firmware version boot and firmware version, update to
does not start up and the corresponding boot and after that
always shows the update the firmware version
message “Os
Loading…”. If the boot and firmware versions are
correct, perform the firmware update
procedure again.
Communications Cannot see properly Disabled Java options in Advanced 1.- Go to Advanced in Internet options
the web server in F650 Internet Explorer properties or high for Internet explorer and select the
with Windows XP. level of security three selections in Microsoft VM (Java
Virtual Machine) and deselect any
Some windows are in other virtual machine not Microsoft, for
grey with a red cross example SUN.
mark. In case Microsoft VM is not installed in
the computer, the user must install it
using the Microsoft VM installation
program msjavx86.exe
For internet explorer 6.0 or higher it is
not included by default.
2.- Try to set a lower level of security in
internet explorer options.
3.-Delete temporary internet files in
“General” screen in internet explorer
options.
Communication Enervista 650 Setup Bad communication in TFTP using Disable and Enable the Ethernet
does not retrieve osc, Windows 2000 connection on Control Panel inside
fault reports and Data Windows 2000. Try again to retrieve
Logger files files from relay
12
... ...
A SWITCH 16 A INPUT
SWITCH 16 B INPUT
Contact input type A to switchgear Function 16
Contact input type B to switchgear Function 16
SWITCH 1 A STATUS Contact logic output type A from switchgear Function 1
SWITCH 1 B STATUS Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function 1
SWITCH 2 A STATUS Contact logic output type A from switchgear Function 2
Switchgear outputs (16 elements) SWITCH 2 B STATUS Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function 2
... ...
SWITCH 16 A STATUS Contact logic output type A from switchgear Function 16
SWITCH 16 B STATUS Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function 16
SWITCH 1 OPEN switchgear 1 open
SWITCH 1 CLOSED switchgear 1 closed
SWITCH 1 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 1 (contact A = 0, contact B = 0)
SWITCH 1 11_ERROR Error 11 switchgear 1 (contact A = 1, contact B = 1)
SWITCH 2 OPEN switchgear 2 open
SWITCH 2 CLOSED switchgear 2 closed
Switchgear states (16 elements) SWITCH 2 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 2 (contact A = 0, contact B = 0)
SWITCH 2 11_ERROR Error 11 switchgear 2 (contact A = 1, contact B = 1)
... ...
SWITCH 16 OPEN switchgear 16 open
SWITCH 16 CLOSED switchgear 16 closed
SWITCH 16 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 16 (contact A = 0, contact B = 0)
SWITCH 16 11_ERROR Error 11 switchgear 16 (contact A = 1, contact B = 1)
FAULT REPORT TRIGG Fault report trigger (1) Active ; (0) Not active
Fault Report (Fault locator) CLEAR FAULT Fault report removal from HMI and ModBus (volatile
REPORTS memory)
FREEZE ENERGY CNT Energy counter freeze
UNFREEZE ENERGY
Energy Counters Energy counter unfreeze
CNT
RESET ENERGY CNT Energy counter reset
DEMAND TRIGGER INP Demand trigger (for Block interval algorithm)
Demand Inputs
DEMAND RESET INP Demand reset
GROUP 1 ACT ON Group 1 activation, and deactivation of groups 2 and 3
GROUP 2 ACT ON Group 2 activation, and deactivation of groups 1 and 3.
GROUP 3 ACT ON Group 3 activation, and deactivation of groups 1 and 2
A Setting Groups SETT GROUPS BLOCK Group change input blocked
GROUP 1 BLOCKED Settings Group 1 blocked
GROUP 2 BLOCKED Settings Group 2 blocked
GROUP 3 BLOCKED Settings Group 3 blocked
PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 1 phase
C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 phase
PH TOC1 HIGH A PKP A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC1 HIGH A OP
1 phase A
PH TOC1 HIGH B PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 phase
B
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC1 HIGH B OP 1 phase B
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 phase
PH TOC1 HIGH C PKP
C A
PH TOC1 HIGH C OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
1 phase C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 any
PH TOC1 HIGH PKP phase
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC1 HIGH OP
1 any phase
PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 2 phase
A
Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 2 phase
PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK B
PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 2 phase
C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2 phase
PH TOC2 HIGH A PKP A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC2 HIGH A OP
2 phase A
Phase TOC High PH TOC2 HIGH B PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2 phase
B
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC2 HIGH B OP 2 phase B
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2 phase
PH TOC2 HIGH C PKP
C
PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 3 phase
A
Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 3 phase
PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK B
Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 3 phase
PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK
C
PH TOC3 HIGH A PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3 phase
A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC3 HIGH A OP 3 phase A
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3 phase
PH TOC3 HIGH B PKP
B
PH TOC3 HIGH PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3 any
phase
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC3 HIGH OP 3 any phase
PH TOC1 LOW C BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Low level
Group 1 phase C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
PH TOC1 LOW A PKP Group 1 phase A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low
PH TOC1 LOW A OP
level Group 1 phase A
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
PH TOC1 LOW B PKP Group 1 phase B
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low
PH TOC1 LOW B OP
level Group 1 phase B
A PH TOC1 LOW C PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
Group 1 phase C
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low
PH TOC1 LOW C OP
level Group 1 phase C
PH TOC1 LOW PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
Group 1 any phase
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low
PH TOC1 LOW OP level Group 1 any phase
Phase timed overcurrent element block Low level
PH TOC2 LOW A BLK
Group 2 phase A
Phase timed overcurrent element block Low level
PH TOC2 LOW B BLK Group 2 phase B
Phase timed overcurrent element block Low level
PH TOC2 LOW C BLK
Group 2 phase C
PH TOC2 LOW A PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
Group 2 phase A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low
PH TOC2 LOW A OP level Group 2 phase A
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
PH TOC2 LOW B PKP
Phase TOC Low Group 2 phase B
PH TOC3 LOW C PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
Group 3 phase C
NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK Neutral timed overcurrent element block Group 1
Ground TOC GROUND TOC2 PKP Ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2
Ground timed overcurrent element operation (trip)
GROUND TOC2 OP
Group 2
GROUND TOC3 BLOCK Ground timed overcurrent element block Group 3
GROUND TOC3 PKP Ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3
Ground timed overcurrent element operation (trip)
GROUND TOC3 OP Group 3
SENS GND TOC1 Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element block
BLOCK Group 1
SENS GND TOC1 PKP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup
Group 1
Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element operation
SENS GND TOC1 OP (trip) Group 1
SENS GND TOC2 Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element block
BLOCK Group 2
Sentive Ground TOC SENS GND TOC2 PKP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup
Group 2
Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element operation
SENS GND TOC2 OP (trip) Group 2
SENS GND TOC3 Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element block
BLOCK Group 3
SENS GND TOC3 PKP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup
Group 3
Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element operation
SENS GND TOC3 OP (trip) Group 3
SENS GND DIR2 BLK IP Sensitive ground directional element block input Group
2
Sensitive Ground Directional SENS GND DIR2
BLOCK Sensitive Ground directional element block Group 2
Neutral OV High NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH Neutral overvoltage element pickup high level Group 2
PKP
NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH Neutral overvoltage element operation high level Group
OP 2
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH
Neutral overvoltage element block high level Group 3
BLK
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH Neutral overvoltage element pickup high level Group 3
PKP
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH Neutral overvoltage element operation high level Group
OP 3
NEG SEQ OV3 PKP Negative sequence overvoltage element pickup Group
3
Negative sequence overvoltage element operation
NEG SEQ OV3 OP Group 3
BROKEN CONDUCT2
Broken conductor block Group 2
BLK
A RESET BKR
COUNTERS Breaker openings and closings counters reset
This document describes the procedure to read and write data in the F650 relay using ModBus/RTU protocol.
To prevent an existing integration from being affected by versions, a generic database has been created, compatible
between versions, with all possible items that a F650 may have, independently from its type or configuration. This
database describes completely each of these items. This descriptions includes the data type, length, memory position,
object version, etc. Moreover, the database will group the different objects by subgroups, such as status and settings
groups.
Each object has a unique memory position for the whole family. Only after reading the objects of a particular relay, it will be
possible to elaborate its map. This map will only be valid for that particular relay and memory version. From one version to
another the memory positions of existing objects remain fixed, and new objects are assigned new addresses, which again
remain the same for following versions.
It is possible to get the Memory Map using EnerVista 650 Setup software, menu:
View, ModBus Memory map
The protocol used is standard ModBus/RTU, so any program or PLC will be able to easily communicate with F650 units.
F650 always works as slave, which means that it never starts the communications. It is always the master who initiates
communication.
Only one ModBus/RTU functions subgroup are implemented:
• Reading function 3 (or 4).
• Writing function 16.
ModBus/RTU protocol is independent from the hardware. This way, the physical layer may be in different hardware
B configurations: RS232, RS485, fiber optic or Ethernet.
F650 units incorporate a front RS232 port, two rear RS485 or fiber optic ports, and a 10/100Base T port, and in some
configurations two 100BaseFX ports. The data flow in any of the configurations is “half-duplex”.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous way and it is formed by: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and 1 parity bit if
programmed. Thus you have a 10 or 11-bit data, depending on whether it has parity or not.
The port baud rate and the parity are independent and programmable for each communication port. Any port may be
programmed to baud rates of: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200. Parity may be pair, impair or
without parity.
The master must know the client address with which it is going to communicate. No unit will operate after a master request
if the message address is not its own, except it the address is 0, which is the broadcast address. In this case the relay will
operate, but won’t send any reply.
Communication is performed in strings, data groups sent in an asynchronous way. The master transmits a string to the
slave and then the slave responds with another string (except for the case of broadcast communication). A timeout or a
silence time in the communication marks the end of a string. The length of this time varies depending on the baud rate,
because it is equal to 3 characters.
The following table shows the generic string format, valid for transmission and reception. However, each function will have
its own particularities, as described later in this manual.
MODBUS FORMAT
CLIENT ADDRESS 1 byte Each device in a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent two
[A] units from responding at the same time to the same request. All relay ports will
use this address, which can be programmed to a value between 1 and 254.
When the master transmits a string with the slave address 0, this indicates that it
is a Broadcast. Every slave in the communication bus will perform the requested
action, but none of them will respond to the master. Broadcast is only accepted for
writing because it is nonsense to perform a reading request in Broadcast, as no
unit will respond to it.
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte This is one of the function codes supported by the equipment. In this case, the
[B] only supported function codes will be 3 and 4 for reading and 16 for writing. When
the slave has to respond with an exception to any of these strings, it will place to 1
the most important bit of the correspondent function. For example, an exception to
B
function 3 will be indicated with an 83 as function code, and an exception to
function 16 or 0x10 in hexadecimal, will be indicated with a 0x90.
DATA N bytes This section includes a variable number of bytes, depending on the function code.
[C] It may include: addresses, data length, settings, commands or exception codes
sent by the client.
CRC 2 bytes Two-byte control code. ModBus/RTU includes a 16-bit CRC in each string for error
[D] detection. If the slave detects a string with errors, based on an incorrect CRC, it
will neither perform any action, nor respond to the master. The CRC order is LSB-
MSB.
TIME OUT Required time to A string is finished when nothing is received during a period of 3,5 bytes:
transmit 3,5 Bytes 15 ms at 2400 bps
2 ms at 19200 bps
300 μs at 115200 bps
etc.
MASTER SERVER
Request
B
OK Response
Error Response
MASTER SERVER
Request
B
OK Response
Error Response
B 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
The slave does not support any function with the received function code in this message.
Master is trying to perform an operation in an incorrect address.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE Slave has detected that the value sent by the master is not valid.
04 ILLEGAL RESPONSE LENGTH Indicates that a response to the master’s request would exceed the maximum specified size for
that function code.
05 ACKNOWLEDGE Generic acknowledgement.
06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY Slave is busy and cannot perform the requested operation.
07 NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE Negative acknowledgement.
B requiring a “time point” for new settings operation. The combination of numbers, enums, etc, which cooperate in fulfill a
determined function is called GROUP
The memory map of a setting GROUP includes: the stored settings at the beginning of its settings zone and a temporary
hole for new settings and confirmation.
When settings are changed, we must write in the selected settings zone, in any order or quantity of written zone, and finally,
to give a reference point we must write a register in the last position of the group, (this is called CONFIRMATION by some
protocols).
For safety reasons, there is certain limitation when CONFIRMING settings GROUPS; the time period from the last settings
writing to CONFIRMATION, cannot exceed 15 seconds.
2º.- The second and following ones are messages of reading on 0xff00 address, where 244-byte strings are read
from the open file. As this process is a request process, if there was a response string with error, the last string can be
requested again, by a reading message on 0xff02 address.
The first reading message shows the events format, information is transmitted in the rest of messages. In the same string,
the first four bytes indicate the file reading position and the following two bytes form a short with the quantity of useful bytes
sent (if it is lower than 244, this indicates that it is the last message).
In the second step, many BUSY responds may be produced, because internally the ASCII format file is being created.
Example:
1st step:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x0C 0x4E 0x45 0x57 0x5F 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x2E 0x54 0x58 0x54 0x00 0x16 0xB0] ---
-----> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x65 0xEC]
2nd step:
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] --------> RELAY
Probably the relay will respond with “SLAVE DEVICE BUSY”:
PC Å--------- [0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xF4 0x46 0x4F 0x52 0x4D 0x41
.............[A].............. .....[B]...... F O R M A
0x54 0x2C 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30
T , E V E N T _ F 6 5 0 _ V 0
0x30 0x2C 0x45 0x76 0x65 0x6E 0x74 0x20 0x4E 0x75 0x6D 0x2C 0x44 0x61 0x74
0 , E v e n t N u m , D a t
B 0x65 0x2F 0x54 0x69 0x6D 0x65 0x3C 0x48 0x65 0x78 0x3E 0x2C 0x43 0x61 0x75
e / T i m e . . . etc . . .
0x73 0x65 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x61 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x62
0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x63 0x2C 0x4C 0x69 0x6E 0x65 0x20 0x46 0x72 0x65 0x71 0x75 0x65
0x6E 0x63 0x79 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x67 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49
0x73 0x67 0x2C 0x5A 0x65 0x72 0x6F 0x20 0x73 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x49 0x30 0x2C 0x50 0x6F 0x73 0x69 0x74 0x69 0x76
0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x49 0x31 0x2C 0x4E 0x65 0x67 0x61 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20
0x49 0x32 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56 0x61 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56
0x62 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56 0x63 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x6F 0x73 0x69 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65
0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x31 0x2C 0x4E 0x65 0x67 0x61 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56
0x32 0x2C 0x5A 0x65 0x72 0x6F 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x30 0x2C 0x33 0x20 0x50 0x68 0x4C 0xF3]
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xF4 0x00 0xF4 0x61 0x73 0x65 0x20 0x50 0x6F
0x77 0x65 0x72 0x20 0x46 0x61 0x63 0x74 0x6F 0x72 0x0D 0x0A
CR LF (here the format ends)
0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x35 0x36 0x35
E V E N T _ F 6 5 0 _ V 0 0 , 5 6 5
0 x37 0x2C 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x66 0x63 0x39 0x38 0x66
7 , 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 6 f 3 9 8 f
0x34 0x33 0x39 0x2C 0x4C 0x6F 0x63 0x61 0x6C 0x20 0x6D 0x6F 0x64 0x65 0x2C
4 3 9 , l o c a l m o d e ,
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30
....
0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30
0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30
0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A
CR LF (a line ends)
0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x35 0x36 0x35 0x38 0x2C 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x66 0x63 0x39 0x38 0x66 0x34 0x33 0x39 0x2C 0x28 0x31 0x29 0x56 0x69 0x72 0x74
0x75 0x61 0x6C 0x20 0x4F 0x75 0x74 0x38 0x39 0x36 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x34 0x24]
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] ---------> RELAY
PC <---------[0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xE8 0x00 0x47 0x30 0x0047 => last string
0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30
0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30
0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A
CR LF (a line ends)
0x00 0x00 0x30 0x0D 0x0A 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x33 0x30
0x39 0x38 0x2C 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x65 0x62 0x61 0x33 0x33 0x62 0x62 0x38 0x2C 0x43 0x6F
0x6E 0x74 0x61 0x63 0x74 0x20 0x4F 0x75 0x74 0x70 0x75 0x74 0x5F 0x30 0x30 0x5F 0x30 0x30 0x20 0x4F 0x4E 0x2C
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E B
0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0xDB 0xB4]
B.1.4.4 OPERATIONS
For executing an Operation, it is necessary to write the bit corresponding to that Operation. For this purpose, there are two
memory records whose bits represent operations. These records are 0xAFFE and 0xAFFF.
Each operation has assigned one bit in the register:
Operation 1: bit 0 ‘0xaffe’
Operation 2: bit 1‘0xaffe’
...
Operation 16: bit 15‘0xaffe’
Operation 17: bit 0‘0xafff’
...
Operation 24: bit 7‘0xafff’
The register format is ‘MOTOROLA’; this means that the first byte arriving is the one with more weight.
Remember that depending on where it communicates the correspondent channel will be activated, which takes part for
B PLC operations if the operation is successful or not. The operations channels are:
0 - MMI
1 - OPER REMOTE
2 - COM 1- COMUNICACION
3 - COM 2- COMUNICACION
4 - RED 1- COMUNICACION
5 - RED 2- COMUNICACION
6 - RED 3- COMUNICACION
7 - RED 4- COMUNICACIÓN
Relay contacts writing in the I/O boards are thought to make easy wiring checks. Proceeding as with a file access, with
opening, writing and lockout.
If it is a writing to a mixed board (includes 16 inputs and 8 outputs):
1º.- OPEN FILE OF OUTPUTS: writing msg to 0xFE20 of 3 registers with the name: OUTPUT
2º. - DESIRED OUTPUTS WRITING writing message to 0xFF20 of 5 REGISTERS, the first one is the board number
(0 or 1) and the restraint ones are the bytes of bits (bits are grouped byte to byte).
3º.- CLOSE FILE OF OUTPUTS: writing msg to 0xFE 28 of 3 registers with the name: OUTPUT
3th Lockout:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x28 0x00 0x03 0x06 0x4F 0x55 0x54 0x50 0x55 0x54 0x29 0xA8] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x28 0x00 0x03 0x25 0xE7]
B Internally the events buffer is a circular FIFO of 255 events. The addresses for managing this FIFO are:
- 0x03FF: Number of the following event
(To know whether there are new events)
- 0xFCFF: Access from the oldest event
- 0xFD00 to 0xFDFF: Access to any of the events (circular queue)
In the 0x03FF address it is stored the event number of the following new event that it is going to be generated. For
instance, if the number 7677 is stored, it means that the last event stored is the number 7676. This value, at the beginning
is 0 and it is increased as soon as events from 0 to 2^12 + 1 carry bit are generated.
Carry bit allows knowing whether the F650 has been started, as when it starts, either for lack of power supply or for a
configuration change, the carry bit is set to 0. When events are generated, the event number will be increased up to a
maximum value of 0x1FFF; in the next event the number will be 0x1000, that is, the bit of carriage will get always to 1, until
a new F650 start up. The next figure shows it:
0x000 0x1000
0x1FFF
0x17FF
The 0xFCFF-address usefulness is for when it is desired to read all the available events in the F650, something that will be
done following a master start up.
WARNING! Unlike a standard ModBus address, these addresses consist of 14 bytes each one, instead of the 2 used in
ModBus. This way, each event, which has a structure of 14 bytes, will be contained in one address, as shown on the table
below:
0xFD00 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte
............ B
0xFDFF 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte
C
i
r
cul
a
rqu
e
u
e
(NOTE: the 0x03FF address will have the event number 7677 because the 7676 is the last one).
ALL EVENTS
There are two possibilities:
First possibility: start in 0xFCFF address and read events 15 by 15. The frame sent to the relay is the following one:
[
0xF
E0
x0
30
xF
C0
xF
F0
x0
00
x6
90
x9
10
x8
B]-
--
--
--
--
>RL
A
EY
1
05
re
gi
ste
rs
:1
5e
ve
nt
s*7
re
gi
ste
rs
.
A
d
dr
ess
re
qu
es
to
fa
l
lth
ee
ve
nt
s
With this frame the buffer pointer will be set over the 7421 event, which in the example is the oldest one in the buffer, so it
will send back all events until number 7435.
Now, to read the following 15, from 7436 to 7450, it is necessary to calculate the initiation address and send another frame:
Hex(7436)= 0x1D0C
0x1D0C AND 0x00FF= 0xOC
0xFD00+0x0C= 0xFD0C: initiation address
[0xFE 0x03 0xFD 0x0C 0x00 0x69 0x60 0x44] ---------> RELAY
So, it will be asked until the relay responds 0 in one of the events, or reading address 0x03FF and checking the event
number from the last event read.
Second possibility: read directly the memory from the 0xFD00 to 0xFDFF address and then arrange by event number.
From that moment, only the new ones must be requested.
NEW EVENTS
In the 0x03FF address there is the number of the following event that is going to be written, therefore, it is possible to know
B how many events must be read from the last time that the relay was asked. If the relay indicated that the new event to be
generated is the 7677.
C
i
r
cu
la
r
qu
e
ue
(NOTE: the 0x03FF address will have the event number 7677, because the last one is 7676).
Supposing that we all events until number 7674 have already been read, now a frame must be sent to read the
corresponding 28 bytes to events 7675 and 7676, given that there are only two new events from the last time that they were
requested.
Hex(7675)=0x1DFB
0x1DFB AND 0xFF=0xFB
0xFD00+0xFB=0xFDFB: reading address (*)
[0xFE 0x03 0xFD 0xFB 0x00 0x0E 0x90 0x5C] ---------> RELAY
The necessary data to retrieve events that have been configured as alarms are located in the following addresses:
0xf000: 24 registers, the first 12 indicate the status active/inactive and the last 12 indicate the status of
acknowledged/not acknowledged.
0xf018: 12 event alarm status (active - not active, acknowledged – not acknowledged) registers.
0xf024: date and hour of the event bits starts (groups of 16 dates and hour must be asked for).
To obtain an instantaneous snapshot of all the events and alarms status, the procedure is:
• - Read the head of events FIFO (0x03FF).
• - Read the zones mentioned before.
• - Finally, read the head again to confirm that it has not changed. If it had changed, restart the procedure.
NOTE: The message must request the address and the quantity of bytes indicated in each zone. If other quantity is needed
it will not respond with the requested data.
B
B.1.6.1 CONTROL EVENTS RETRIEVAL FROM THE COMMAND LINE
Starting EnerVista 650 Setup form the command line offers the possibility of transferring control events to a file. For this
purpose, we need to indicate the event number from which event controls are to be retrieved, and the file where they are to
be stored.
Communication can be established via serial communication by specifying the port and access baudrate, or via Ethernet
through the IP address and communication port. The relay number from which events are to be retrieved must also be
indicated.
For executing this Operation, 6 parameters must be written, for both cases, serial communication or Ethernet.
Time synchronization is made by a reading message over 0xfff0 address, either with the address of a single relay, if a
writing confirmation is desired, or in broadcast, to synchronize several relays simultaneously.
Date/time format is unsigned double (8 bytes) in MOTOROLA format, which indicates the passed milliseconds from 1st of
January 2000.
Reading example:
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0x60 0x21] ---------> RELAY
PC <---------- [0xFE 0x03 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x17 0x05 0xFA 0xD5 0xBA 0x2D 0x1D]
Synchronism example:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x17 0x9B 0x53 0x3F 0x60 0xA4 0x2B] ---------> RELAY
PC <---------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0xE5 0xE2]
NOTE: As the relay is internally a modular system, it is possible that the response of some process is slower than what is
expected by the external program, considering the message as missed and sending again another request. If so, there will
be 2 queued messages and therefore, 2 messages will be responded. For this reason, response message ‘ACK’ must be
verified with its request, and special attention must be paid to setting confirmation writings, especially with reference to
time-out. EnerVista 650 Setup software is recommended to do the configuration modifications, as this software takes into
The screen will display that group settings, on the left side bottom the relay reading request will appear
<0001><06/18/03 12:14:15>[0xFE 0x03 0x21 0x8A 0x00 0x16 0xFB 0xDD]
And on the right the settings response will appear:
0001><06/18/03 12:14:15>[0xFE 0x03 0x2C 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F
0x80 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x42 0xC8 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0xFE
0x00 0xFE 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF6 0xAC 0xB5]
This way, any request or mechanism to obtain information from the relay, can be viewed string by string.
There is another tool for tracing the relay memory: in F650 menu: Communication, Troubleshooting, any reading to any
address can be requested, the PC will form the string together with check-sum register.
0X11,0Xd1,0Xd0,0X10,0Xf0,0X30,0X31,0Xf1,0X33,0Xf3,
0Xf2,0X32,0X36,0Xf6,0Xf7,0X37,0Xf5,0X35,0X34,0Xf4,
0X3c,0Xfc,0Xfd,0X3d,0Xff,0X3f,0X3e,0Xfe,0Xfa,0X3a,
0X3b,0Xfb,0X39,0Xf9,0Xf8,0X38,0X28,0Xe8,0Xe9,0X29,
0Xeb,0X2b,0X2a,0Xea,0Xee,0X2e,0X2f,0Xef,0X2d,0Xed,
0Xec,0X2c,0Xe4,0X24,0X25,0Xe5,0X27,0Xe7,0Xe6,0X26,
0X22,0Xe2,0Xe3,0X23,0Xe1,0X21,0X20,0Xe0,0Xa0,0X60,
0X61,0Xa1,0X63,0Xa3,0Xa2,0X62,0X66,0Xa6,0Xa7,0X67,
0Xa5,0X65,0X64,0Xa4,0X6c,0Xac,0Xad,0X6d,0Xaf,0X6f,
0X6e,0Xae,0Xaa,0X6a,0X6b,0Xab,0X69,0Xa9,0Xa8,0X68,
0X78,0Xb8,0Xb9,0X79,0Xbb,0X7b,0X7a,0Xba,0Xbe,0X7e,
0X7f,0Xbf,0X7d,0Xbd,0Xbc,0X7c,0Xb4,0X74,0X75,0Xb5,
0X77,0Xb7,0Xb6,0X76,0X72,0Xb2,0Xb3,0X73,0Xb1,0X71,
0X70,0Xb0,0X50,0X90,0X91,0X51,0X93,0X53,0X52,0X92,
B 0X96,0X56,0X57,0X97,0X55,0X95,0X94,0X54,0X9c,0X5c,
0X5d,0X9d,0X5f,0X9f,0X9e,0X5e,0X5a,0X9a,0X9b,0X5b,
0X99,0X59,0X58,0X98,0X88,0X48,0X49,0X89,0X4b,0X8b,
0X8a,0X4a,0X4e,0X8e,0X8f,0X4f,0X8d,0X4d,0X4c,0X8c,
0X44,0X84,0X85,0X45,0X87,0X47,0X46,0X86,0X82,0X42,
0X43,0X83,0X41,0X81,0X80,0X40 };
UCHAR chi;
UCHAR clo;
USHORT ui;
chi = 0xff;
clo = 0xff;
while(us--)
{ ui = chi ^ *p++;
chi = clo ^ hi[ui];
clo = lo[ui];
}
ui = chi;
ui = ui << 8;
ui = ui | clo; // motorola format
return(ui);
}
USHORT xx;
xx = vpet_read.check;
B
if(fn_035c_cr16( (UCHAR *)&vpet_read, sizeof(PET_READ)-2) == xx)
{ OK }
else
{ko }
The Memory map can be obtained from EnerVista 650 Setup software, menu:
View > ModBus Memory map
B 0x00F8
0x00F8
0x0020
0x0040
PH IOC2 HIGH A PKP
PH IOC2 HIGH A OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x00F8 0x0080 PH IOC2 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0100 PH IOC2 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0200 PH IOC2 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0400 PH IOC2 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0800 PH IOC2 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x1000 PH IOC2 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x2000 PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x4000 PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x8000 PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0001 PH IOC3 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0002 PH IOC3 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0004 PH IOC3 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0008 PH IOC3 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0010 PH IOC3 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0020 PH IOC3 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0040 PH IOC3 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0080 PH IOC3 HIGH OP F001 R 1
B 0x0139
0x0139
0x8000
0x0001
SENS GND IOC2 PKP
SENS GND IOC2 OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x013E 0x0002 SENS GND IOC3 BLK F001 R 1
0x013E 0x0004 SENS GND IOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x013E 0x0008 SENS GND IOC3 OP F001 R 1
B 0x0179
0x0179
0x0800
0x1000
SENS GND TOC2 PKP
SENS GND TOC2 OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x017E 0x2000 SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x017E 0x4000 SENS GND TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x017E 0x8000 SENS GND TOC3 OP F001 R 1
B 0x01A5
0x01A5
0x0400
0x0800
THERMAL1 ALARM
THERMAL1 OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x01A5 0x1000 THERMAL1 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x2000 THERMAL1 A OP F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x4000 THERMAL1 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x8000 THERMAL1 B OP F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0001 THERMAL1 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0002 THERMAL1 C OP F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0004 THERMAL2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0008 THERMAL2 A RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0010 THERMAL2 B RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0020 THERMAL2 C RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0040 THERMAL2 ALARM F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0080 THERMAL2 OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0100 THERMAL2 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0200 THERMAL2 A OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0400 THERMAL2 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0800 THERMAL2 B OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x1000 THERMAL2 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x2000 THERMAL2 C OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x4000 THERMAL3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x8000 THERMAL3 A RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0001 THERMAL3 B RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0002 THERMAL3 C RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0004 THERMAL3 ALARM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0008 THERMAL3 OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0010 THERMAL3 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0020 THERMAL3 A OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0040 THERMAL3 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0080 THERMAL3 B OP F001 R 1
0x01B1 0x0100 THERMAL3 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B1 0x0200 THERMAL3 C OP F001 R 1
B 0x01F0
0x01F0
0x2000
0x4000
DL-DB OPERATION
DL-LB OPERATION
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x01F0 0x8000 LL-DB OPERATION F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0001 SLIP CONDITION F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0002 BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0004 BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ F001 R 1
Reenganchador (bit) - Autorecloser
0x01F5 0x0008 AR LEVEL BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0010 AR PULSE BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0020 AR PULSE UNBLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0080 AR INITIATE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0100 AR CONDS INPUT F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0200 AR CLOSE BREAKER F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0400 AR OUT OF SERVICE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0800 AR READY F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x1000 AR LOCKOUT F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x2000 AR BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x4000 AR RCL IN PROGRESS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x8000 AR LCK BY ANOMALY F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0001 AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0002 AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0004 AR LCK BY USER F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0008 AR LCK BY CONDS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0010 AR LCK BY TRIPS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0020 AR LCK BY SHOTS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0040 AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0080 AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT F001 R 1
0x01F7 0x0100 AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT F001 R 1
0x01F7 0x0200 AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT F001 R 1
0x01F7 0x0400 AR BLOCK BY LEVEL F001 R 1
0x01F7 0x0800 AR BLOCK BY PULSE F001 R 1
B 0x0230
0x0230
0x0020
0x0040
PHASE OV2 CA PKP
PHASE OV2 CA OP
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x0230 0x0080 PHASE OV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0231 0x0100 PHASE OV2 OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0200 PHASE OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0400 PHASE OV3 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0800 PHASE OV3 AB OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x1000 PHASE OV3 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x2000 PHASE OV3 BC OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x4000 PHASE OV3 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x8000 PHASE OV3 CA OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0001 PHASE OV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0002 PHASE OV3 OP F001 R 1
Sobretensión Auxiliar - Auxiliary OV
0x023B 0x0004 AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x023B 0x0008 AUXILIARY OV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x023B 0x0010 AUXILIARY OV1 OP F001 R 1
0x0240 0x0020 AUXILIARY OV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0240 0x0040 AUXILIARY OV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0240 0x0080 AUXILIARY OV2 OP F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0100 AUXILIARY OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0200 AUXILIARY OV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0400 AUXILIARY OV3 OP F001 R 1
B 0x027A
0x027A
0x0040
0x0080
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x027B 0x0100 OSCILLO TRIGGER F001 R 1
Localizador de Faltas - Fault Report
0x0280 0x0200 FAULT REPORT TRIGG F001 R 1
0x0280 0x0400 CLEAR FAULT REPORTS F001 R 1
Agrupamiento de Funciones - Group States
0x028F 0x0400 GROUP 1 ACT ON F001 R 1
0x028F 0x0800 GROUP 2 ACT ON F001 R 1
0x028F 0x1000 GROUP 3 ACT ON F001 R 1
0x028F 0x2000 SETT GROUPS BLOCK F001 R 1
0x028F 0x4000 GROUP 1 BLOCKED F001 R 1
0x028F 0x8000 GROUP 2 BLOCKED F001 R 1
0x028F 0x0001 GROUP 3 BLOCKED F001 R 1
Canal por defecto - Default Channel (not used)
0x0294 0x0002 Default Channel F001 R 1
Unidad de Conductor Roto - Broken Conductor
0x0294 0x0004 BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK F001 R 1
0x0294 0x0008 BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0294 0x0010 BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0020 BROKEN CONDUCT2 BLK F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0040 BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0080 BROKEN CONDUCT2 OP F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0100 BROKEN CONDUCT3 BLK F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0200 BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0400 BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP F001 R 1
Energía - Energy
0x02A4 0x0800 FREEZE ENERGY CNT F001 R 1
0x02A4 0x1000 UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT F001 R 1
0x02A4 0x2000 RESET ENERGY CNT F001 R 1
Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Output Operate -logical status-
0x031B 0x0002 CONT OP OPER_H_01 F001 R 1
0x031B 0x0004 CONT OP OPER_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031C 0x0001 CONT OP OPER_H_16 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Output Resets
0x031C 0x0002 CONT OP RESET_H_01 F001 R 1
0x031C 0x0004 CONT OP RESET_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031D 0x0001 CONT OP RESET_H_16 F001 R 1
Estado Salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Outputs -physical status-
0x031D 0x0002 CONT OP_H_01 F001 R 1
0x031D 0x0004 CONT OP_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031E 0x0001 CONT OP_H_16 F001 R 1
B 0x0379
0x0379
0x0400
0x0800
SWITCH 2 00_ERROR
SWITCH 2 11_ERROR
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037C 0x0001 SWITCH 16 OPEN F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0002 SWITCH 16 CLOSED F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0004 SWITCH 16 00_ERROR F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0008 SWITCH 16 11_ERROR F001 R 1
Estados Inicio Apertura y Cierre Aparamenta - Switchgear Open-Close Initializing States
0x037C 0x0010 SWITCH 1 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0020 SWITCH 1 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0040 SWITCH 2 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0080 SWITCH 2 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037E 0x0004 SWITCH 16 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037E 0x0008 SWITCH 16 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
Estados Fallo Apertura y Cierre Aparamenta - Switchgear Fail States
0x037E 0x0010 SWGR 1 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
0x037E 0x0020 SWGR 2 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037F 0x0008 SWGR 16 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
0x037F 0x0010 SWGR 1 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1
0x037F 0x0020 SWGR 2 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0380 0x0008 SWGR 16 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1
B 0x0C08
0x0C0A
Phasor Ib
RMS Ib
F002
F002
1000
1000
R
R
2
2
0x0C0C Ib Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C0E Ib Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C10 Phasor Ic F002 1000 R 2
0x0C12 RMS Ic F002 1000 R 2
0x0C14 Ic Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C16 Ic Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C18 Phasor In F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1A In Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1C In Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1E Phasor Ig F002 1000 R 2
0x0C20 RMS Ig F002 1000 R 2
0x0C22 Ig Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C24 Ig Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C26 Phasor Isg F002 1000 R 2
0x0C28 RMS Isg F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2A Isg Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2C Isg Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2E Zero seq I0 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C30 I0 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C32 I0 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C34 Positive Seq I1 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C36 I1 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C38 I1 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C3A Negative Seq I2 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C3C I2 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C3E I2 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C40 Phasor Vab F002 1000 R 2
0x0C42 Vab Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C44 Vab Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C46 Phasor Vbc F002 1000 R 2
B 0x0CBE
0x0CC0
Ib Angle
Ic Angle
F002
F002
1000
1000
R
R
2
2
0x0CC2 In Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC4 Ig Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC6 Isg Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC8 Va Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCA Vb Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCC Vc Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCE Vn Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD0 Vx Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD2 Vab Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD4 Vbc Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD6 Vca Angle F002 1000 R 2
Valores Imagen Térmica - Thermal Image Values
0x0DD9 THERMAL1 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DDB THERMAL1 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DDD THERMAL1 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2
0x0DE4 THERMAL2 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DE6 THERMAL2 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DE8 THERMAL2 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2
0x0DEF THERMAL3 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DF1 THERMAL3 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DF3 THERMAL3 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2
B 0x0EFE
0x0F00
V0 Primary
V1 Primary
F002
F002
1000
1000
R
R
2
2
0x0F02 V2 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F04 Vab Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F06 Vbc Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F08 Vca Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0A Va Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0C Vb Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0E Vc Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F10 Vn Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F12 Vx Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F14 VBB Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F16 VL Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F18 Phase A Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F1A Phase A Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F1C Phase A Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F1E Phase B Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F20 Phase B Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F22 Phase B Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F24 Phase C Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F26 Phase C Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F28 Phase C Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2A 3 Phase Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2C 3 Phase Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2E 3 Phase Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F30 Phase A Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F32 Phase B Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F34 Phase C Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F36 3 Phase Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F38 Line Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0F3A Bus Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0F3C Positive MWatthour F002 1000 R 2
B 0x1172
0x1174
Buffer RAM
Cached RAM
F005
F005
1024
1024
R
R
2
2
0x1176 Green Counter F005 1 R 2
0x1178 Yellow Counter F005 1 R 2
0x117A Orange Counter F005 1 R 2
0x117C Red Counter F005 1 R 2
0x117E UpTime F005 1 R 2
Funciones Protección habilitadas - Protection Summary
0x2204 0x0001 Phase IOC1 High F001 R 1
0x2220 0x0001 Phase IOC2 High F001 R 1
0x223C 0x0001 Phase IOC3 High F001 R 1
0x2258 0x0001 Phase IOC1 Low F001 R 1
0x2274 0x0001 Phase IOC2 Low F001 R 1
0x2290 0x0001 Phase IOC3 Low F001 R 1
0x22AC 0x0001 Neutral IOC1 F001 R 1
0x22C7 0x0001 Neutral IOC2 F001 R 1
0x22E2 0x0001 Neutral IOC3 F001 R 1
0x22FD 0x0001 Ground IOC1 F001 R 1
0x2319 0x0001 Ground IOC2 F001 R 1
0x2335 0x0001 Ground IOC3 F001 R 1
0x2351 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC1 F001 R 1
0x236D 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC2 F001 R 1
0x2389 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC3 F001 R 1
0x23A5 0x0001 Phase TOC1 High F001 R 1
0x23C2 0x0001 Phase TOC2 High F001 R 1
0x23DF 0x0001 Phase TOC3 High F001 R 1
0x23FC 0x0001 Neutral TOC1 F001 R 1
0x2417 0x0001 Neutral TOC2 F001 R 1
0x2432 0x0001 Neutral TOC3 F001 R 1
0x244D 0x0001 Ground TOC1 F001 R 1
0x2469 0x0001 Ground TOC2 F001 R 1
0x2485 0x0001 Ground TOC3 F001 R 1
B 0x2E8F
0x2EAA
0x0001
0x0001
Sensitive Ground Directional3
Forward power1
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x2EC9 0x0001 Forward power2 F001 R 1
0x2EE8 0x0001 Forward power3 F001 R 1
0x2F07 0x0001 Demand F001 R 1
0x2F20 0x0001 IEC104 Protocol F001 R 1
0x32A5 0x0001 Phase TOC1 Low F001 R 1
0x32C2 0x0001 Phase TOC2 Low F001 R 1
0x32DF 0x0001 Phase TOC3 Low F001 R 1
0x38D4 0x0001 Data Logger F001 R 1
0x38FA 0x0001 Directional Power1 F001 R 1
0x391D 0x0001 Directional Power2 F001 R 1
0x3940 0x0001 Directional Power3 F001 R 1
0x3963 0x0001 Locked Rotor1 F001 R 1
0x3978 0x0001 Locked Rotor2 F001 R 1
0x398D 0x0001 Locked Rotor3 F001 R 1
Funciones con Eventos habilitados - Snapshot Events Summary
0x1EE5 0x0001 Board F Event F001 R 1
0x208A 0x0001 Board G Event F001 R 1
0x2199 0x0001 General Settings Event F001 R 1
0x220C 0x0001 Phase IOC1 High Event F001 R 1
0x2228 0x0001 Phase IOC2 High Event F001 R 1
0x2244 0x0001 Phase IOC3 High Event F001 R 1
0x2260 0x0001 Phase IOC1 Low Event F001 R 1
0x227C 0x0001 Phase IOC2 Low Event F001 R 1
0x2298 0x0001 Phase IOC3 Low Event F001 R 1
0x22B3 0x0001 Neutral IOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x22CE 0x0001 Neutral IOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x22E9 0x0001 Neutral IOC3 Event F001 R 1
0x2305 0x0001 Ground IOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x2321 0x0001 Ground IOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x233D 0x0001 Ground IOC3 Event F001 R 1
B 0x2A0C
0x2A81
0x0001
0x0001
Underfrequency3 Event
Oscillography Event
F001
F001
R
R
1
1
0x2A9F 0x0001 Fault Report Event F001 R 1
0x2C0D 0x0001 Broken Conductor1 Event F001 R 1
0x2C26 0x0001 Broken Conductor2 Event F001 R 1
0x2C3F 0x0001 Broken Conductor3 Event F001 R 1
0x2E03 0x0001 Isolated Ground IOC1 Event F001 R 1
0x2E24 0x0001 Isolated Ground IOC2 Event F001 R 1
0x2E45 0x0001 Isolated Ground IOC3 Event F001 R 1
0x2E60 0x0001 Sensitive Ground Directional1 Event F001 R 1
0x2E7B 0x0001 Sensitive Ground Directional2 Event F001 R 1
0x2E96 0x0001 Sensitive Ground Directional3 Event F001 R 1
0x2EB5 0x0001 Forward Power1 Event F001 R 1
0x2ED4 0x0001 Forward Power2 Event F001 R 1
0x2EF3 0x0001 Forward Power3 Event F001 R 1
0x2F0C 0x0001 Demand Event F001 R 1
0x32AE 0x0001 Phase TOC1 Low Event F001 R 1
0x32CB 0x0001 Phase TOC2 Low Event F001 R 1
0x32E8 0x0001 Phase TOC3 Low Event F001 R 1
0x3909 0x0001 Directional Power1 Event F001 R 1
0x392C 0x0001 Directional Power2 Event F001 R 1
0x394F 0x0001 Directional Power3 Event F001 R 1
0x396D 0x0001 Locked Rotor1 Event F001 R 1
0x3982 0x0001 Locked Rotor2 Event F001 R 1
0x3997 0x0001 Locked Rotor3 Event F001 R 1
Mapa de Usuario - User Map
0xF330 Address 00 F004 1 R 1
0xF331 Address 01 F004 1 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0xF42F Address 255 F004 1 R 1
APPENDIX C C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL FOR F650 C.1.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL SETTINGS
F650 units enable the user to program certain parameters related to DNP3 protocol. These parameters are called DNP3
protocol settings and can be modified from the front panel or from the Level 2 software. The F650 relay supports
communication with multiple masters (3) and maintains three separate groups of DNP3 settings. Each group of DNP3
settings is related to a single logical DNP3 slave device. The F650 relay is able to communicate simultaneously with up to
three different DNP3 master stations. Each master communicates with a different logical DNP3 slave, these logical slaves
appearing as separate physical DNP3 slaves. This is achieved by keeping separate set of settings, event queues and set of
states for each logical device.
Notice that it is necessary to set different DNP Address and TCP/UDP Port for each logical DNP3 slave device.
In the current 1.72 firmware version of the F650 relay only the first logical DNP3 slave can be configured DNP3 over serial
link (COM1 or COM2). Therefore setting the DNP3 Physical Port to COM1 or COM2 for the second or the third logical slave
devices will have no effect. The second and the third logical DNP3 slave devices can only communicate using DNP3 over
TCP/IP.
Time synchronization through DNP protocol is available from all three DNP masters that can communicate with F650.
However the date & time will be taken from only one master at the same moment. It is recommended to use only one
master to do time sync through DNP.
1. Physical Port: The F650 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The F650 can be used as a
DNP slave device connected up to three DNP masters (usually RTUs or SCADA master stations).. The Physical
Port setting is used to select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol for a specific logical DNP slave
device of F650.. When this setting is set to NETWORK, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/
IP.
2. Address: This setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies de F650 on a DNP communications link.
Each logical DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.
C 3-22. IP Addr Client x Oct x: this setting is one of four octets of an IP address. The F650 relay can respond to a
maximum of 5 specific DNP masters (not in the same time). To set the IP address of DNP master it is necessary to
set four octets (e.g. to set the IP address of the first DNP master to 192.168.48.125, you should set IP Addr Client1
Oct1 = 192, IP Addr Client1 Oct2 = 168, IP Addr Client1 Oct3 = 48, IP Addr Client1 Oct4 = 125).
23. TCP/UDP Port: TCP/UDP port number for the case of DNP3 communication being performed through the
Ethernet.
24. Unsol Resp Function: ENABLED, if unsolicited responses are allowed, and DISABLED otherwise.
25. Unsol Resp TimeOut: sets the time the F650 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response.
26. Unsol Resp Max Ret: This setting determines the number of times the F650 will retransmit an unsolicited response
without receiving a confirmation from the master. Once this limit has been exceeded, the unsolicited response will
continue to be sent at larger interval. This interval is called unsolicited offline interval and is fixed at 10 minutes.
27. Unsol Resp Dest Adr: This setting is DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to
which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the F650 from either the current DNP TCP connection or the
most recent UDP message.
28-32. Scale Factor: These settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the F650
Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for
all Analog Input points of that type. For example, if the Voltage Scale Factor is set to a value of 1000, all DNP
Analog Input points that are voltages will be returned with the values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value 72000 V on
the F650 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within
certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be
10 times larger).
33-37. Deadband: These settings are the values used by the F650 to determine when to trigger unsolicited responses
containing Analog Input data. These settings group the F650 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power,
energy, and other. Each setting represents the default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For
example, in order to trigger unsolicited responses from the F650 when any current values change by 15 A, the
Current Deadband setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands.
DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP Analog
Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the F650, the default deadbands will be in effect.
38. Msg Fragment Size: This setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer
confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels
39-48. Binary Input Block x: These settings allow customization and change of the size of DNP Binary Inputs point list.
The default Binary Inputs point list contains 160 points representing binary states that are configured using
“Setpoint->Relay Configuration” menu from the F650PC program. These 160 binary states are grouped in 10
blocks of 16 points each. There are 128 bits (8 blocks of 16) called Control Events and 32 bits (2 blocks of 16)
corresponding to the states of 16 switchgears available in F650 relay. If not all of the 160 points are required in the
DNP master, a custom Binary Inputs point list can be created by selecting up to 10 blocks of 16 points. Each block
represents 16 Binary Input points. Block 1 represents Binary Input points 0-15, block 2 represents Binary Input
points 16- 31, block 3 represents Binary Input points 32-47, etc. The minimum number of Binary Input points that
can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of the Binary Input Block x settings are set to “NOT USED”, the default list of
160 points will be in effect. The F650 will form the Binary Inputs points list from the Binary Input Block x settings
up to the first occurrence of a setting value “NOT USED”. Permitted values for these settings are: NOT USED, CTL
EVENTS 1-16, CTL EVENTS 17-32, CTL EVENTS 33-48, CTL EVENTS 49-64, CTL EVENTS 65-80, CTL
EVENTS 81-96, CTL EVENTS 97-112, CTL EVENTS 113-128, SWITCHGEAR 1-8, SWITCHGEAR 9-16.
The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
a) DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (SHEET 2 OF 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: F650 Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests: Level 2 Master
For Responses: Level 2 a Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Inputs Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Maximum Data Link String Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
C Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: Configurable up to 2048
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
None a None
a Fixed at 2 Configurable
Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
a Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
variation requested: specific variation requested:
Never Never
a Only time-tagged a Binary Input Change With Time
Only non-time-tagged Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never a Never
a Configurable When Device Restarts
Only certain objects When Status Flag Change
Sometimes (attach explanation)
a ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function codes No other options permitted
supported
Default CounterObject/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:
a No Counters Reported a No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation) Configurable (attach explanation)
Default Object: 16 Bits
C Default Variation: 32 Bits
Other Value: ______
Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
a Yes
No
The following table shows objects, variations, function codes and qualifiers supported by F650 units, both in requests and
responses for DNP3 protocol. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07 or 08, will
be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers
17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Text in bold and italic indicates functionality higher than DNP3 implementation level 2.
2 0
Binary Input Change - All Variations
See Note 1 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07,08 (limited qty) C
06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 17, 28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
06 (no range, or all)
00,01 (start-stop)
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
Binary Output Status 06 (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start-stop)
10 2 1 read 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
See Note 1 07,08 (limited qty) See Note 2
17,28 (index)
3 (select)
4 (operate) 00,01 (start-stop)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) echo of request
5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir.op, noack)
1 (select)
7 (freeze)
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 8 (freeze noack) 06 (no range, or all)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz.cl. noack)
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28,
respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01
(for change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded).
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – The F650 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28,
respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01
(for change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded).
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – The F650 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
1 (read)
07 (limited qty)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 2 (write) 129 (response) quantity=1
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 06 (no range, or all)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
60 1 Class 0 Data 06 (no range, or all)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol) 06 (no range, or all)
60 2 Class 1 Data
21 (disable unsol) 07,08 (limited qty)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol) 06 (no range, or all)
C
60 3 Class 2 Data
21 (disable unsol) 07,08 (limited qty)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol) 06 (no range, or all)
60 4 Class 3 Data
21 (disable unsol) 07,08 (limited qty)
22 (assign class)
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28,
respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01
(for change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded).
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – The F650 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
The F650 relay has a configurable Map of DNP Binary Input points. This map can be formed by up to 10 blocks of 16 binary
states that are configured using “Setpoint->Relay Configuration” menu from the F650PC program. The minimum number of
DNP Binary Input points is 16 and the maximum number is 160. Within these 160 DNP points, 128 bits (8 blocks of 16) are
mapped to Control Events (Setpoint->Relay Configuration->Control Events) and 32 bits (2 block of 16) are mapped to
contacts A, B of 16 Switchgears (Setpoint->Relay Configuration->Switchgear). Each Switchgear in F650 is mapped into
two DNP Binary Input points. Lets say the setting Binary Input Block1 has been set the value Switchgear 1-8, it means that
DNP Binary Input point 0 = Switchgear 1Contact A, DNP Binary Input point 1 = Switchgear 1 Contact B, DNP Binary Input
point 2 = Switchgear 2 Contact A, etc.
To each Control Event or Switchgear Contact, the user can assign any of the binary states of the F650 relay. These states
are contact inputs and outputs, virtual outputs, protection element states, PLC states, etc. DNP Points that correspond to
Control Events o Switchgear Contacts that are not configured will have a zero value in the response.
Using the PLC-Editor, through the F650PC program, selecting menu: Setpoint->Logic Configuration, it will be possible to
implement complex logic, more than simple OR and NOT previous functions. To perform this, in the menu: Setpoint->Relay
Configuration->Control Events assign a Virtual Output to selected point, after that, implement wished logic with the PLC-
Editor.
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
0-127 Control Events 1-128 143 Switchgear 8 Contact B
128 Switchgear 1 Contact A 144 Switchgear 9 Contact A
129 Switchgear 1 Contact B 145 Switchgear 9 Contact B
130 Switchgear 2 Contact A 146 Switchgear 10 Contact A
131 Switchgear 2 Contact B 147 Switchgear 10 Contact B
132 Switchgear 3 Contact A 148 Switchgear 11 Contact A
133 Switchgear 3 Contact B 149 Switchgear 11 Contact B
134 Switchgear 4 Contact A 150 Switchgear 12 Contact A
135 Switchgear 4 Contact B 151 Switchgear 12 Contact B
136 Switchgear 5 Contact A 152 Switchgear 13 Contact A
137 Switchgear 5 Contact B 153 Switchgear 13 Contact B
138 Switchgear 6 Contact A 154 Switchgear 14 Contact A
139 Switchgear 6 Contact B 155 Switchgear 14 Contact B
140 Switchgear 7 Contact A 156 Switchgear 15 Contact A
141 Switchgear 7 Contact B 157 Switchgear 15 Contact B
142 Switchgear 8 Contact A 158 Switchgear 16 Contact A
159 Switchgear 16 Contact B
In the example presented in this chapter the F650 relay has 48 Binary Input points, as shown in the table below.
Hub or
Switch
DNP3 Slave
F650 Relay
DNP 3.0 Slave – F650 DNP 3.0 Master 1 DNP 3.0 Master 2 DNP 3.0 Master 3
DNP 3.0 slave 1 DNP3 over TCP/IP DNP3 over TCP/IP DNP3 over TCP/IP
Physical Port: Network DNP Addr: 200 DNP Addr: 201 DNP Addr: 202
Address: 255 DNP Dest Addr: 255 DNP Dest Addr: 256 DNP Dest Addr: 257
IP Addr Cli1: 192.168.37.1 IP Dest: 192.168.37.20 IP Dest : 192.168.37.20 IP Dest: 192.168.37.20
TCP/UDP Port : 20000 TCP Dest Port: 20000 TCP Dest Port: 20001 TCP Dest Port: 20002
Unsol Dest Addr: 200
Currently there are no Binary Counters in the F650 relay. Nevertheless F650 accepts requests of DNP objects 20 (Binary
Counters), 21 (Frozen Counters) and 22 (Counter Change Events). Function codes “Immediate Freeze”, “Freeze and
Clear” etc. are accepted and F650 will respond with no objects and the IIN2-1 (Object Unknown) flag set. This behavior is
in conformance with DNP Level 2 Implementation (Document 28528: Level 2 DNP 3.00 Implementation).
It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.
Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. This is a
DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical
Bulletin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. The scale factors apply also to deadbands. For example if Current
Scale Factor is set to 0.001, and it is desired that a specific Analog Input point (that is of type current) trigger an event when
its value changes by 1 kA, then the deadband for this point should be set to 1000. Relay settings are available to set default
deadband values according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
C
Units for Analog Input points are as follows:
The F650 is an IEC server. Answers to clients request or can send spontaneous Transmission. F650 implementation of
60870-5-104 provides analog meterings and states.
ASDU is the information unit used for data transmission. An ASDU may have data inside or not. The ASDU is encapsulated
in another package of the link layer. ASDU address takes up 2 bytes.
Communication frames can be control or data frames. Control strings do not have ASDU inside.
A frame is consist on 3 parts. (2 of them are not always present):
Link data + [ASDU header+ [ASDU data]]
The data between brackets can be omitted
In IEC104 communication is made by TCP/IP protocols. Actually, it is a TCP communication. The default port is the 2404.
The F650 is listening as a server. Only one client is attended at time.
Spontaneous Transmission:
2 ASDU for measured values (timing is set in Cyclic Meter Period, 0 means no spontaneous transmission).
1 ASDU for single point information in the time the event is produced (128 points in user map).
1 ASDU for Double point information in the time the event is produced (16 Switchgear information).
Clock synchronization:
Command transmission:
The Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol are the following:
The F650 relay has a custom Binary Inputs points list, called User Map; it is common for any protocol. In the
case of IEC 104 Protocol, those points are GROUP1 and GROUP2.
The IEC 104 User Map can be configured using the EnerVista 650 Setup software in Settings>Relay
Configuration->Control Events. The User Map contains 128 Binary Inputs. To each point of the User Map,
D the user can assign any of the binary states of the F650 relay, also is possible to combine those states using
OR and NOT functions. These states are: contact inputs and outputs, virtual outputs, protection element
states, PLC states, etc. The User Map always has a size of 128 Binary Inputs. Points in the User Map that are
not configured will have a zero value in the answer.
It is possible to implement more complex logic than simple OR and NOT using the PLC Editor tool in
EnerVista 650 Setup in the menu Settings>Logic Configuration. These complex signals (Virtual Outputs)
can be assigned to the binary points in the Control Events configuration for the IEC 104 user map.
GROUP 1 STATUS
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ SP_NA_1 Points
1000-1063 CONTROL EVENTS
D
GROUP 2 STATUS
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ SP_NA_1 Points
1064-1127 CONTROL EVENTS
GROUP 3 STATUS
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ DP_NA_1 Points
1500-1515 SWITCHGEAR EVENTS
OPERATIONS
POINT DESCRIPTION
C_SC_NA_1
3000 – 3011 Command OFF
3000 – 3011 Command ON
CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION
POINT DESCRIPTION
C_SC_NA_1
0 Set Date
The date in the answer is the same as the received in the command.
The relay date is synchronized after performing this command.
RESET OF PROCESS
POINT DESCRIPTION
C_RP_NA_1
0 Reset of Process
D
QRP_RESET_GRAL: General reset of process.
DELAY ADQUISITION
POINT DESCRIPTION
C_CS_NA_1
0 Delay Acquisition
The date in the answer is the same as the received in the command.
PICKUPS
110
PH TOC1 HIGH PKP 46
111 325
VO_053_51P_PKP
PH TOC2 HIGH PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
112 inOR2
PH TOC3 HIGH PKP
322 inOR3
PH TOC1 LOW PKP inOR4
323
PH TOC2 LOW PKP inOR5
324 inOR6
PH TOC3 LOW PKP
107
45
PH IOC1 HIGH PKP 11
VO_051_50PH_PKP
108 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH IOC2 HIGH PKP
inOR2
109
PH IOC3 HIGH PKP inOR3
104 44
PH IOC1 LOW PKP 10
VO_050_50PL_PKP
105 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH IOC2 LOW PKP
106 inOR2
101 43
GROUND TOC1 PKP 1
VO_049_51G_PKP
102 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
GROUND TOC2 PKP
inOR2
103
GROUND TOC3 PKP inOR3
98
GROUND IOC1 PKP 42
0
VO_048_50G_PKP
99 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
GROUND IOC2 PKP
inOR2
100
GROUND IOC3 PKP inOR3
226 225
VO_049_51G_PKP OR 227
228 VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_048_50G_PKP
197 201
SENS GND TOC1 PKP 193
VO_003_51SG_PKP
198 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
SENS GND TOC2 PKP
inOR2
199
SENS GND TOC3 PKP inOR3
194
200
SENS GND IOC1 PKP 192
VO_002_50SG_PKP
195 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
SENS GND IOC2 PKP
inOR2
196
SENS GND IOC3 PKP inOR3
179
ISOLATED GND1 PKP 178
177
VO_043_50IG_PKP
OVERCURRENT 180 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PICKUPS ISOLATED GND2 PKP
181 inOR2
E VO_043_50IG_PKP
212
inOR3
215
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP 211
VO_006_I2 _TOC_PKP
213 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP
inOR2
214
NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP inOR3
235
VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP
236 314
VO_008_NEUTRAL_OVERCURRENT_PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
237
inOR2
VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP
234
238 inOR3
VO_011_ALL_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_010_SENSITIVE_GROUND_PKP inOR4
239
VO_006_I2_TOC_PKP inOR5
315 inOR6
VO_001_THERMAL_ALARM
92
40
PHASE UV1 PKP 2
VO_045_27P_PKP
93 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PHASE UV2 PKP
94 inOR2
266 In OR3
VO_012_59NH_PKP
267 In OR4
VO_013_59NL_PKP In OR5
269
VO_015_59X_PKP In OR6
270 In OR7
VO_016_V2_OV_PKP
113
47
OVERFREQ1 PKP 25
114 VO_054_81O_PKP
inOR1 OR3 outOR1
OVERFREQ2 PKP
inOR2
115
OVERFREQ3 PKP inOR3
116
48
UNDERFREQ1 PKP 26
FREQUENCY VO_055_81U_PKP
PICKUPS 117 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
UNDERFREQ2 PKP
inOR2
118
UNDERFREQ3 PKP inOR3
49 27
VO_054_81O_PKP OR 51
50 VO_056_ALL_FREQUENCY_PKP
VO_055_81U_PKP
276
BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP 279
275
VO_018_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_PKP
277 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
BROKEN
BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP
CONDUCTOR inOR2
278
BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP inOR3
349
FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP 355
350 348
VO_023_FORWARD_POWER_PKP
FWD PWR1 STG2 PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
351
inOR2
FWD PWR2 STG1 PKP
FORWARD 352 inOR3
POWER
FWD PWR2 STG2 PKP
inOR4
353
FWD PWR3 STG1 PKP inOR5
354 inOR6
FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP
394
372
DIR PWR1 STG PKP 375
VO_025_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_PKP
373 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
DIRECTIONAL
POWER DIR PWR2 STG PKP
374 inOR2
397 400
396
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP VO_029_LOCKED_ROTOR_PKP
398 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
LOCKED
ROTOR LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP
399 inOR2
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP
inOR3
280 91
409
VO_011_ALL_OVERCURRENT_PKP VO_085_GENERAL_PKP
281 inOR1 OR6 outOR1
VO_017_ALL_VOLTAGE_PKP
282 inOR2
VO_056_ALL_FREQUENCY_PKP
283
GENERAL inOR3
PICKUP VO_018_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_PKP
381 inOR4
VO_026_POWER_PKP
410 inOR5
VO_029_LOCKED_ROTOR_PKP
inOR6
TRIPS
119
PH TOC1 HIGH OP 52
120 318
VO_057_51P_TRIP
PH TOC2 HIGH OP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
121
inOR2
PH TOC3 HIGH OP
319 inOR3
321 inOR6
PH TOC3 LOW OP
122
PH IOC1 HIGH OP 53
12
VO_058_50 PH_TRIP
123 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH IOC2 HIGH OP
inOR2
124
PH IOC3 HIGH OP inOR3
125
54
PH IOC1 LOW OP 32
VO_059_50 PL_TRIP
126 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH IOC2 LOW OP
inOR2
127
PH IOC3 LOW OP inOR3
131
56
THERMAL1 OP 13
VO_062_THERMAL_TRIP
132 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
THERMAL2 OP
inOR2
133
OVERCURRENT THERMAL3 OP inOR3
TRIPS
286
285
VO_057_51P_TRIP 313
VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
287 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
VO_058_50 PH_TRIP
inOR2
288
VO_059_50 PL_TRIP inOR3
137
58
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
139 inOR1
8
OR3 outOR1
VO_065_51N_TRIP E
NEUTRAL TOC2 OP
138 inOR2
140
63
GROUND IOC1 OP 15
VO_068_50G_TRIP
141 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
GROUND IOC2 OP
inOR2
142
GROUND IOC3 OP inOR3
65 16
VO_067_51G_TRIP OR 64
66 VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
VO_068_50G_TRIP
149
SENS GND TOC1 OP 67
18
VO_070_51 SG_TRIP
150 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
SENS GND TOC2 OP
inOR2
151
SENS GND TOC3 OP inOR3
146
68
SENS GND IOC1 OP 17
VO_071_50SG_TRIP
147 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
SENS GND IOC2 OP
inOR2
148
SENS GND IOC3 OP inOR3
183
186
ISOLATED GND1 OP 182
VO_044_50IG_TRIP
184 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
ISOLATED GND2 OP
OVERCURRENT
inOR2
TRIPS 185
ISOLATED GND3 OP inOR3
70
69
VO_070_51SG_TRIP 176
VO_072_SENSITIVE_GROUND_TRIP
71 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
VO_071_50SG_TRIP
inOR2
187
VO_044_50IG_TRIP inOR3
128
55
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP 4
VO_061_I2_TOC_TRIP
129 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
NEG SEQ TOC2 OP
inOR2
130
E NEG SEQ TOC3 OP
290
inOR3
VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
291 316
VO_066_NEUTRAL_OVERCURRENT_TRIPinOR1 OR6 outOR1
292
inOR2
VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
293 inOR3
VO_072_SENSITIVE_GROUND_TRIP
inOR4
294
289
VO_061_I2_TOC_TRIP inOR5
VO_020_ALL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
317
inOR6
VO_062_THERMAL_TRIP
152
72
PHASE UV1 OP 5
VO_073_27P_TRIP
153 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PHASE UV2 OP
154 inOR2
OVERFREQ3 OP inOR3
173
86
UNDERFREQ1 OP 37
FREQUENCY VO_081_81U_TRIP
174 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
TRIPS
UNDERFREQ2 OP
inOR2
175
UNDERFREQ3 OP inOR3
88 38
VO_080_81O_TRIP OR 87
89 VO_082_ALL_FREQUENCY_TRIP
VO_081_81U_TRIP
304
BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP 307
303
VO_022_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP
305 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
BROKEN
CONDUCTOR BROKEN CONDUCT2 OP
inOR2
306
BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP inOR3
359
FWD PWR1 STG1 OP 365
360 358
VO_024_FORWARD_POWER_TRIP
FWD PWR1 STG2 OP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
361 inOR2
FWD PWR2 STG1 OP
FORWARD inOR3
362
POWER
FWD PWR2 STG2 OP inOR4
363
inOR5
FWD PWR3 STG1 OP
364 inOR6
FWD PWR3 STG2 OP
383
387
DIR PWR1 STG OP 386
VO_027_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_TRIP
384 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
DIRECTIONAL
DIR PWR2 STG OP
POWER inOR2
385
389
inOR3
391
VO_024_FORWARD_POWER_TRIP OR 392
POWER
390 VO_028_POWER_TRIP
VO_027_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_TRIP
403 406
402
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP VO_030_LOCKED_ROTOR_TRIP
404 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
LOCKED
ROTOR LOCKED ROTOR2 OP
405 inOR2
LOCKED ROTOR3 OP
inOR3
308 90
407
VO_020_ALL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
310 inOR1 OR6 outOR1
VO_079_ALL_VOLTAGE_TRIP
311 inOR2
VO_082_ALL_FREQUENCY_TRIP
GENERAL 309 inOR3
TRIP VO_022_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP
393 inOR4
VO_028_POWER_TRIP
408 inOR5
VO_030_LOCKED_ROTOR_TRIP
inOR6
Unsolicited responses permission Unsol Resp Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Time out to confirm an unsolicited Unsol Resp TimeOut 5 1s [0 : 60]
response
Number of retransmition of an unsol
resp w/o confirmation Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 N/A [0 : 255]
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Scale for power Power Scale Factor 1 N/A 0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Scale for energy Energy Scale Factor 1 N/A 0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Other Scale factor Other Scale Factor 1 N/A 0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Default deadband for Current Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Current Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Default deadband for Voltage Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Voltage Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Default deadband for Power Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Power Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Default deadband for Energy Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Energy Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Default deadband for Other Analog
Input points to trigger unsolicited Other Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
responses
Size (in bytes) for message Msg Fragment Size 240 1 byte [30 : 2048]
fragmentation
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 1 CTL EVENTS 1-16 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 2 CTL EVENTS 17-32 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 3 CTL EVENTS 33-48 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 4 CTL EVENTS 49-64 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 5 CTL EVENTS 65-80 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 6 CTL EVENTS 81-96 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 7 CTL EVENTS 97- N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list 112
Size customization and change of Binary Input Block 8 CTL EVENTS 113- N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP Binary Inputs point list 128
F
Size customization and change of
DNP Binary Inputs point list Binary Input Block 9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8 N/A [See DNP note2]
DNP NOTES
Note 1: Scale Factor Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times
[NOT USED, CTL EVENTS 1-16, CTL EVENTS 17-32, CTL EVENTS 33-48,CTL EVENTS 49-
Note 2: Binary Input Block Selection: 64, CTL EVENTS 65-80, CTL EVENTS 81-96, CTL EVENTS 97-112, CTL EVENTS 113-128,
SWITCHGEAR 1-8, SWITCHGEAR 9-16]
Data logger Rate Data Logger Rate 1s N/A [1 s, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min,
20 min, 30 min, 60 min.]
Data Logger analog channels X Data Logger Chnl X None N/A
Demand method for Power values POWER Demand THERMAL N/A ROLLING DEMAND -
Method EXPONENTIAL
THERMAL
EXPONENTIAL]
Demand interval Demand Interval 5 Minutes N/A [5 – 10 – 15 – 20– 30–60] F
Trigger Enabled Trigger Enabled DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
KI2t integration time KI2t Integ. Time 0.03 0.01s [0.03 : 0.25]
Maximum number of openings Maximum Openings 9999 1 [0 : 9999]
Maximum Openings in one hour Max.Openings 1 hour 40 1 [1 : 60]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > PHASE CURRENT > PHASE DIRECTIONAL >
PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1> PHASE DIRECTIONAL 2 > PHASE DIRECTIONAL 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Maximum Torque Angle MTA 45 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N/A [FORWARD – REVERSE]
Block logic Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 40 1V [0 : 300]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
F SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > PHASE CURRENT > THERMAL MODEL >
THERMAL MODEL 1> THERMAL MODEL 2 > THERMAL MODEL 3
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL TOC 1> NEUTRAL TOC 2 > NEUTRAL TOC 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Curve shape Curve IEEE Ext Inv N/A [See list of curves]
Time Dial TD Multiplier 1.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
[INSTANTANEOUS –
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A LINEAR]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL IOC
NEUTRAL IOC 1> NEUTRAL IOC 2 > NEUTRAL IOC 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Pickup level Pickup Level 30.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEUTRAL CURRENT > NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL >
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1> NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 2 > NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Maximum Torque Angle MTA -45 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N/A [FORWARD – REVERSE]
Polarization type Polarization VO N/A [V0 – IP – V0+IP – V0*IP ]
Block logic type Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 10 1V [0 : 300]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND TOC
GROUND TOC 1> GROUND TOC 2 > GROUND TOC 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED] F
Input type Input PHASOR(DFT) N/A [PHASOR – RMS]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Curve shape Curve IEEE Ext Inv N/A [See list of curves]
Time Dial TD Multiplier 1.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
[INSTANTANEOUS –
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A
LINEAR]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND IOC
GROUND IOC 1> GROUND IOC 2 > GROUND IOC 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Input type Input PHASOR(DFT) N/A [PHASOR – RMS]
Pickup level Pickup Level 30.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > GROUND CURRENT > GROUND DIRECTIONAL >
GROUND DIRECTIONAL 1> GROUND DIRECTIONAL 2 > GROUND DIRECTIONAL 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Maximum Torque Angle MTA -45 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N/A [FORWARD – REVERSE]
Polarization type Polarization VO N/A [V0 – IP – V0+IP – V0*IP ]
Block logic type Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 10 1V [0 : 300]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND TOC
SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 1> SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 3
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND IOC
SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 1> SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND IOC 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Input type Input PHASOR(DFT) N/A [PHASOR – RMS]
Pickup level Pickup Level 0.100 0.001 A [0.005 : 16.000]
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > ISOLATED GROUND IOC
ISOLATED GROUND IOC 1> ISOLATED GROUND IOC 2 > ISOLATED GROUND IOC 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
VALUE
Function Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
High Voltage level Vh Level 20 1V [2 : 70]
Low Current level Il LEVEL 0.005 0.001 A [0.005 : 0.400]
Low Voltage level Vl LEVEL 2 1V [2 : 70]
High Current level Ih LEVEL 0.025 0.001 A [0.005 : 0.400]
Operation time Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Deviation time to instantaneous Time to inst 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT > SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL >
SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 1> SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 2 > SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Maximum Torque Angle MTA -45 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N/A [FORWARD – REVERSE]
Block logic type Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 10 1V [0 : 300]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC >
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 1> NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 2 > NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
VALUE F
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Curve shape Curve IEEE Ext Inv N/A [See list of curves]
Time Dial TD Multiplier 1.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
[INSTANTANEOUS –
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A LINEAR]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > PHASE UV >
PHASE UV 1> PHASE UV 2 > PHASE UV 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > PHASE OV >
PHASE OV 1> PHASE OV 2 > PHASE OV 3
USER
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Pickup Level Pickup Level 10 1V [3 : 300]
Trip time Trip Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
[ANY PHASE – TWO
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A
PHASES – ALL PHASES]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
[NONE,
I/O board type (available only for CIO
I/O Board Type_H NONE N/A 16 INP + 8OUT,
modules)
8 INP + 8OUT + SUPV]
Input activation voltage threshold Voltage Threshold
Group A A_X 80 1V [0 : 255]
ENERVISTA 650
BOARD
ASSOCIATED DIGIT SETUP BOARD TYPE
SETTINGS
For the I/O board selection in the relay
model:
0 NONE None
1 16 INP+ 8OUT Mixed
8 INP +8 OUT Supervisio
2
+SUPV n
0Z Is the name used for the different outputs in I/O boards, 8 outputs available for any of
the two types of board (01,…., 08)
NOTE:
SOURCE COLUMN:
This columns allow selecting the simple or complex (OR signal or Virtual output) operand that actives the selected
elements on relay configuration
If more than one operands are selected, the relay performs an OR gate with them to activate the selected element.
SIGNAL LOGIC COLUMN:
Refers to each individual signal selected on its left. NOT legend means that the refered signal is inverted
SOURCE LOGIC COLUMN:
Refers to the whole SOURCE signal selected on its left. NOT legend means that SOURCE signal is inverted
If more than one operand were selected, the OR gate output is inverted
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>OUTPUTS
OUTPUT ID OUTPUT NAME SOURCE SIGNAL SOURCE
LOGIC LOGIC
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>LEDS
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC1 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC1 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC1 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC2 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC2 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
F PH IOC2 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC3 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC3 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC3 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP NOT
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP NOT
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP NOT
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC5 (50G BLOCK)(CC5)
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK
GROUND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC5 (50G BLOCK)(CC5)
GROUND IOC2 BLOCK
GROUND DIR2 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC5 (50G BLOCK)(CC5)
GROUND IOC3 BLOCK
GROUND DIR3 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
SENS GND IOC1 BLK SENS GND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
SENS GND IOC2 BLK SENS GND DIR2 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
SENS GND IOC3 BLK SENS GND DIR3 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5 F
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP NOT
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP NOT
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP NOT
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC6 (51G BLOCK)(CC6)
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK
GROUND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC6 (51G BLOCK)(CC6)
GROUND TOC2 BLOCK
GROUND DIR2 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC6 (51G BLOCK)(CC6)
GROUND TOC3 BLOCK
GROUND DIR3 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
F GROUP 1 BLOCKED
SENS GND TOC1 BLOCKSENS GND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
SENS GND TOC2 BLOCKSENS GND DIR2 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
SENS GND TOC3 BLOCKSENS GND DIR3 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
PHASE UV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PHASE UV2 BLOCK GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PHASE UV3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC3 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC3 (51P BLOCK)(CC3)
PH TOC3 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
DIR PWR1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
DIR PWR2 BLOCK GROUP 2 BLOCKED
DIR PWR3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
LOCKED ROTOR2 BLK GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LOCKED ROTOR3 BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED
THERMAL1 A RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL1 B RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL1 C RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL2 A RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL2 B RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL2 C RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL3 A RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL3 B RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL3 C RST OPERATION BIT 4
SYNCROCHECK BLK
Not Configured
INP
CONT IP_F_CC8 (79 BLOCK)(CC8)
AR LEVEL BLOCK
LATCHED VIRT IP 14
AR PULSE BLOCK Not Configured
AR PULSE UNBLOCK Not Configured
VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
AR INITIATE CONT IP_F_CC7 (79 INITIATE)(CC7)
LATCHED VIRT IP 13
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM NOT
AR CONDS INPUT NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 15
BKR FAIL INITIATE Not Configured
RESET KI2t COUNTERS OPERATION BIT 5
RESET BKR COUNTERS OPERATION BIT 5
GROUP 1 ACT ON Not Configured
GROUP 2 ACT ON Not Configured
GROUP 3 ACT ON Not Configured
F
FAULT REPORT TRIGG VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
CLEAR FAULT REPORTSNot Configured
DEMAND TRIGGER INP Not Configured
DEMAND RESET INP OPERATION BIT 7
FREEZE ENERGY CNT Not Configured
UNFREEZE ENERGY
Not Configured
CNT
RESET ENERGY CNT OPERATION BIT 6
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>OSCILLOGRAPHY
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>OPERATIONS
OPERATION OPERATION TEXT SETTINGS VALUE/SOURCE
INTERLOCK(LOGIC) SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) BREAKER CLOSED
FRONT KEY I Key
Operation1 CLOSE BREAKER INPUT Not configured
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 1000
CHANNELS ALL
INTERLOCK(LOGIC) Not configured
FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) BREAKER OPEN
FRONT KEY O Key
Operation2 OPEN BREAKER INPUT Not configured
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 1000
CHANNELS ALL
INTERLOCK(LOGIC) Not configured
FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) Not configured
FRONT KEY Not configured
F Operation3 LEDS RESET INPUT Not configured
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
INTERLOCK(LOGIC) Not configured
FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) Not configured
FRONT KEY Not configured
Operation4 THERMAL RESET INPUT Not configured
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
SETPOINT>RELAY CONFIGURATION>SWITCHGEAR
SIGNAL SOURCE
SWITCHGEAR SETTING VALUE/SOURCE
LOGIC LOGIC
CONTACTS 52b
OPENING TIME 1000
CLOSING TIME 1000
CONTACT A
SOURCE N/A
CONTACT B CONT IP_F_CC1 (52b)(CC1)
SOURCE
OPEN TEXT 52 OPEN
ALARM NO
SWITCHGEAR 1 CLOSED TEXT 52 CLOSE
ALARM NO
F ERROR 00 TEXT 52 ERROR
ALARM N/A
ERROR 11 TEXT 52 UNDEFINED
ALARM N/A
OPENING INIT OPERATION BIT 2
CLOSING INIT OPERATION BIT 1
SWITCHGEAR 4
ALARM Not Configured F
CLOSED TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
ERROR 00 TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
ERROR 11 TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
OPENING INIT Not Configured
CLOSING INIT Not Configured
SWITCHGEAR 10
ALARM Not Configured F
CLOSED TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
ERROR 00 TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
ERROR 11 TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
OPENING INIT Not Configured
CLOSING INIT Not Configured
SWITCHGEAR 16
ALARM Not Configured F
CLOSED TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
ERROR 00 TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
ERROR 11 TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
OPENING INIT Not Configured
CLOSING INIT Not Configured
1.11 2.00 New model F2G0 (inputs and outputs board type 2) F650BABF2G0HI October 14th
2002
1.13 2.20 Snapshot Events included (New and All) ALL December
Oscillography up to 4 records. Maximum 70 cycles at 64 samples 20th 2002
per cycle, trip programmable via PLC.
Broken Conductor protection function included.
Boot program updated through F650PC program
1.14 2.20 DNP 3.0 Level 2 protocol included, over TCP/IP and UDP/IP ALL January 22nd
IRIG_B synchronization 2003
1.20 2.25 Programmable Graphical display ALL January 28th
Calibration included to improve measurement accuracy 2003
1.30 2.25 Sensitive ground directional unit ALL March 31st
Isolated Ground directional unit (in 5th current transformer) 2003
Energy measurements
1.31 2.25 Enhancements in 60 Hz measurements ALL April 9th 2003
Extended Settings Range in Negative Sequence Overcurrent
function (46)
1.33 2.30 Forward Power function (32FP) ALL May 9th 2003
Demand
1.44 2.30 51PL function included (besides existing 51PH) ALL July 24th 2003
Control Events
Alarms
ModBus over TCP/IP
1.48 2.30 Changes in 67 units in reverse mode ALL September
ModBus TCP/IP enhancement 5th 2003
1.50 2.30 PROTECTION ALL October 31st
The following operation curves have been added to F650 2003
functionality:
IEC Long-Time Inverse
IEC Short-Time Inverse
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normally Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
Rectifier Curve
User Curve A/B/C/D - Flex Curve™
Note: User Curves allow the user to program any non-standard
curve type by selecting, point by point, the Operation time.
HARDWARE
Voltage Range:Voltage Metering Range expanded from (2 to 200
Volts) to (2 to 275V)
CIO Module: For those applications requiring a high number of
inputs and outputs, F650 units can be connected to a CIO module
(Remote CAN Bus I/O module) for using up to 2 additional boards.
COMMUNICATIONS
ModBus Protocol:
ModBus User Map
Virtual Inputs (control over internal logic variables, which can be
used in the configurable logic).
DNP 3.0 Protocol
New Metering scale factors
Switchgear bits mapped to binary points
Possibility of restricting the binary points map by setting
USER INTERFACE
G
HMI Configurable Main Screen:
The main screen offers the possibility to select the initial logo, a
simplified Metering screen showing primary values, or both.
Snapshot Events:
Possibility of viewing snapshot events from the relay display in
models without graphical display.
GE Power Management, S.A. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from defects in
material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from
factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay providing
the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an
authorized service center or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay, which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident, incorrect
installation, or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin
authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for expenses
sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard Conditions
of Sale.